User Guide
www.sprint.com
©2011 Sprint. SPRINT and the logo are trademarks of Sprint.
Other marks are the property of their respective owners.
11/18/10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Tip: Looking for something? If you don’t see it in the headings
listed here, try the Index on page 276.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Your Device’s Menu
This User Guide introduces you to Sprint® service and
all the features of your new device. It’s divided into four
sections:
The following table outlines your device’s main menu
structure. From the Home screen, press
menu.
to open the
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Tip:
For most programs or games on the device, pressing
brings up options available for the application or
game.
All apps
Scenes
Note: Because of updates in phone software, this printed
guide may not be the most current version for your
phone. Visit www.sprint.com and sign on to My Sprint
to access the most recent version of the user guide.
1: Sprint Scene
2: HTC
WARNING:
Please refer to the Important Safety
about information that will help you safely use
your device. Failure to read and follow the
Important Safety Information in this device
guide may result in serious bodily injury, death,
or property damage.
3: Social
4: Work
5: Play
6: Travel
7: Clean Slate
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2: Wi-Fi
Add to Home
1: Widget
3: Wi-Fi settings
1: Wi-Fi
3: Add Wi-Fi network
2: Network notification
2: App
3: Shortcut
4: Folder
4: Bluetooth
5: Bluetooth settings
1: Bluetooth
3: Discoverable
5: Scan for devices
2: Device name
4: Advanced Settings
Wallpaper
1: Live wallpapers
3: Gallery
2: HTC wallpapers
6: Sprint Hotspot
Notifications
7: Sprint Hotspot settings
Settings
1: Router name
(SSID)
3: Password
2: Security
1: Personalize
1: Scenes
4: Manage users
8: 4G
2: Home wallpaper
3: Default ringtone
9: 4G settings
1: 4G
2: Network notification
3: Network provider 4: Signal strength
5: IP address
2: Wireless & networks
1: Airplane mode
10: VPN settings
1: Add VPN
11: Mobile network
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12: Mobile networks
10: Plus code dialing
1: Data roaming
3: Data roaming
sound
2: Data Roam Guard
4: Enable always-on
mobile data
1: North American dialing
2: International dialing
4: Sound
5: Roaming
6: Call guard
1: Sound profile
3: Vibrate
5: Quiet ring on
pickup
2: Volume
4: Phone ringtone
6: Notification sound
13: USB tethering
3: Call
1: Voicemail service
2: Voicemail settings
7: Audible touch
tones
9: Screen lock
sounds
8: Audible selection
10: Vibrate feedback
3: Clear voicemail notification
4: TTY mode
11: Emergency tone
5: Display
1: TTY Off
2: TTY Full
1: Auto-rotate screen 2: Animation
3: TTY HCO
4: TTY VCO
3: Brightness
4. Screen timeout
5: Notification flash 6: G-Sensor calibration
5: Hearing aids
6: Accounts & sync
6: Phone settings
1: Background data
2: Auto-sync
1: Edit default
message
2: Edit message
3: Save to contacts
3: Exchange ActiveSync (if available)
7: DDTM mode
8: Voice Privacy
1: Account settings 2: Schedule
3: Mail
4: Contacts
5: Calendar
9: Automatic prepend
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4: Facebook (if available)
7: Location
1: Account settings 2: Sync Contacts
5: Facebook for HTC Sense (if available)
1: Account settings 2: Sync Contacts
6: Flickr (if available)
1: Use wireless networks 2: Location setting
3: Use GPS satellites
8: Search
1: Google search
3: Clear shortcuts
2: Searchable items
1: Account settings 2: Sync Contacts
7: Google (if available)
9: Connect to PC
1: Default connection
type
2: Ask me
1: Sync Contacts
3: Sync Calendar
2: Sync Gmail
10: Security
8: Twitter for HTC Sense (if available)
1: Set up screen lock
3: Set password
5: Install from SD card
2: Visible passwords
4: Use secure credentials
6: Clear all credentials
1: Account settings 2: Sync Peep
3: Sync Friend
9: News
11: Applications
1: Account settings 2: Sync news
10: Stocks
1: Unknown sources
3: Manage applications 4: Running services
5: Development
2: Quick launch
1: Account settings 2: Sync stock info
11: Weather
12: SD & phone storage
1: Total space
3: Unmount SD card
5: Available space
2: Available space
4: Format SD card
6: Factory data reset
1: Account settings 2: Sync weather
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13: Date & time
18: About phone
1: Phone identity
1: Automatic
3: Select time zone
5: Use 24-hour format
2: Set date
4: Set time
6: Select date format
1: Model number
3: Phone number
5: Current username
2: MEID
4: IMSI
14: Language & keyboard
1: Select language
2: Battery
1: Battery status
3: Battery use
5: Awake time
2: Battery level
4: Up time
1: English
2: Español
2: Touch Input
1: Keyboard types
3: Text input
5: Tutorial
2: International keyboard
4: Chinese Text input
6: Personal dictionary
3: Hardware information
1: Hardware version
3: Bluetooth address
2: Wi-Fi MAC address
4: 4G MAC address
15: Accessibility
4: Software information
16: Voice input & output
1: Android version
3: Kernel version
5: Software number
7: PRI Version
2: Baseband version
1: Voice recognizer settings
2: Text-to-speech settings
4: Build number
6: Browser version
8: PRL Version
17: System updates
5: Legal information
1: Firmware update
3: Update PRL
2: Update profile
4: HTC software update
1: HTC legal
3: Google legal
2: Sprint legal
4: Open source licenses
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Insert the battery, contacts end first, and gently
press the battery into place.
1A. Setting Up Service
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Ⅲ Replace the battery compartment cover, making
sure all the locking tabs are seated and there are
no gaps around the cover.
Note: When you turn on your device for the first time, you will
be given options to let you quickly set up various
accounts, such as your Google account, Facebook,
Flickr, Twitter, Microsoft® Exchange ActiveSync®, and
other email accounts. We recommend that you skip
these.
Setting Up Your Device
1. Install the battery.
Ⅲ Insert a coin or other flat object into the slot at the
bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift
the up gently to remove.
2. Press
to turn the device on.
Ⅲ If your device is activated, it will turn on, search for
Sprint service, and enter standby mode.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Make your first call.
Ⅲ Tap
Ⅲ From your computer’s Web browser, go to
www.sprint.com/activate and complete the
onscreen instructions to activate your device.
.
Ⅲ Use the onscreen keypad to enter a phone
number.
When you have finished, make a phone call to
confirm your activation. If your device is still not
activated or you do not have access to the Internet,
contact Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727
for assistance.
Ⅲ Tap
.
Note: Your phone’s battery should have enough charge for
your phone to turn on and find a signal, set up your
voicemail, and make a call. You should fully charge
your battery as soon as possible. See “Charging the
Battery” on page 20 for details.
Tip: Do not press
while the phone is being activated.
cancels the activation process.
Pressing
Note: If you are having difficulty with activation, contact Sprint
Customer Service by dialing 1-888-211-4727 from any
other phone.
Activating Your Device
ⅷ If you purchased your device at a Sprint Store, it is
probably activated and ready to use.
ⅷ If you received your device in the mail and it is for a new
Sprint account or a new line of service, it is designed to
activate automatically. To confirm your activation,
make a phone call.
ⅷ If you received your device in the mail and you are
activating a new device for an existing number on your
account, you will need to go online to activate your
new device.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information about using your voicemail, see
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered
calls to your voicemail, even if your device is in use or
turned off. You should set up your Sprint Voicemail and
personal greeting as soon as your device is activated.
Always use a password to protect against unauthorized
access.
Sprint Account Passwords
As a Sprint customer, you enjoy unlimited access to
your personal account information, your voicemail
account, and your data services account. To ensure
that no one else has access to your information, you
will need to create passwords to protect your privacy.
1. Press
and tap
> Voicemail.
2. In the Personalize your Voicemail window, tap
Personalize now.
Account User Name and Password
If you are the account owner, you will create an account
user name and password when you sign on to
3. Your device will automatically connect with Sprint
voicemail service. Follow the system prompts to:
www.sprint.com. (Click Sign in and then click Sign up
now! to get started.) If you are not the account owner (if
someone else receives the bill for your Sprint service),
you can get a sub-account password at www.sprint.com.
Ⅲ Create your password.
Ⅲ Record your name announcement.
Ⅲ Record your greeting.
Note: Voicemail Password
Voicemail Password
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a
password when setting up your voicemail to protect
against unauthorized access. Without a password,
anyone who has access to your device is able to
access your voicemail messages.
You’ll create your voicemail password when you set up
your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your Voicemail” on
page 4 for more information on your voicemail
password.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Learn more about data services and other products
like games, ring tones, screen savers, and more.
Data Services Password
With your Sprint phone, you may elect to set up an
optional data services password to control access and
authorize Premium Service purchases.
From Your Sprint Phone
1. Press
and tap
.
For more information, or to change your passwords,
sign on to www.sprint.com or call Sprint Customer
Service at 1-888-211-4727.
2. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Tap
to check minute
usage and account balance.
Ⅲ Tap
Ⅲ Tap
to make a payment.
to access a summary
Getting Help
of your Sprint service plan or get answers to other
questions.
Managing Your Account
Online: www.sprint.com
From Any Other Phone
ⅷ Access your account information.
ⅷ Sprint Customer Service: 1-888-211-4727.
ⅷ Business Customer Service: 1-800-927-2199.
ⅷ Check your minutes used (depending on your Sprint
service plan).
ⅷ View and pay your bill.
ⅷ Enroll in Sprint online billing and automatic payment.
ⅷ Purchase accessories.
ⅷ Shop for the latest Sprint phones.
ⅷ View available Sprint service plans and options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Sprint 411
Sprint 411 gives you access to a variety of services and
information, including residential, business, and
government listings; movie listings or showtimes;
driving directions, restaurant reservations, and major
local event information. You can get up to three pieces
of information per call, and the operator can
automatically connect your call at no additional charge.
There is a per-call charge to use Sprint 411, and you
will be billed for airtime.
ᮣ
Tap
.
Sprint Operator Services
Sprint Operator Services provides assistance when you
place collect calls or when you place calls billed to a
local telephone calling card or third party.
ᮣ
Tap
.
For more information or to see the latest in products
and services, visit us online at www.sprint.com.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tip: Device Software Upgrades – Updates to your device’s
software may become available from time to time.
Sprint will automatically send critical updates to your
device. You can also check for and download updates
2A. Device Basics
by pressing
>
, and then tapping Settings >
System updates > Firmware update to search for and
download available updates.
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key Functions
Your Device
1. Front Indicator Light (LED) shows your device’s
connection status at a glance.
1
2
2. Proximity Sensor automatically switches the display
screen off when you hold the device near your
face during a call. When activated, the proximity
sensor does not affect the device’s 3G, 4G, or
Wi-Fi connection.
3
4
3. Earpiece lets you hear the caller and automated
prompts.
4. Display Screen displays all the information needed
to operate your device, such as the call status, the
People list, the date and time, and the signal and
battery strength.
5. Menu Key allows you to open a list of actions that
9
8
7
5
6
you can do on the current screen.
6. Home Key takes you back to the Home screen.
When in standby mode, press and hold to open
the recently used applications window.
7. Microphone allows other callers to hear you clearly
when you are speaking to them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
8. Search Key allows you to search information on the
16
15
14
13
12
11
current screen or application. For example, while in
People, press
to search for a contact.
9. Back Key allows you to go back to the previous
screen, or close a dialog box, options menu, the
Notifications panel, or onscreen keyboard.
10. Charger/Accessory Jack allows you to connect the
device charger or the USB cable (included).
CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into the incorrect
jack may damage the device.
11. Volume Button allows you to adjust the ringer or
media volume or adjust the voice volume during a
call.
12. Flash helps illuminate subjects in low-light
environments when the camera is focusing and
capturing a photo or video.
13. Speaker lets you hear the different ringers and
sounds. The speaker also lets you hear the caller’s
voice in speakerphone mode.
10
14. Camera Lens lets you take pictures and videos.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15. 3.5 mm Headset Jack allows you to plug in either a
stereo headset or an optional headset for
convenient, hands-free conversations. CAUTION!
Inserting an accessory into the incorrect jack may
damage the device.
Turning Your Device On and Off
Turning Your Device On
ᮣ
Press
at the top of the device.
16. Power Button lets you turn the device on or off or
turn the screen on or off, or switch your device to
silent mode, vibration mode, or airplane mode.
17. QWERTY Keyboard slides out from the left side of
the device.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
To unlock the screen:
Turning Your Device Off
Press and hold the
lock screen bar and
then drag it down to
unlock the screen
or answer an
1. Press and hold
for about two seconds.
Note: When the screen is locked and you press
, it will
only turn off the screen and not the device. You will
need to unlock the screen first before you press and
hold
to turn the device off. See “Turning the
incoming call.
Screen Off When Not in Use” for details.
2. On the Phone options menu, tap Power off.
3. In the Power off confirmation box, tap OK.
Lock screen bar
Turning the Screen Off When Not in Use
To save battery power, the device automatically turns
off the screen after a certain period of time when you
leave it idle. You will still be able to receive messages
and calls while the device’s screen is off.
Tip: For information on how to adjust the time before the
You can also turn off and lock the screen by pressing
Note: If you have set up a screen lock, you will be prompted
to draw the pattern, enter the PIN, or enter the
password. For more information on how to create and
enable a screen lock, see “Protecting Your Device with
. Pressing
again or receiving an incoming
call will turn on your device screen and show the lock
screen.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing the Display Screen
Status Bar – Notification Icons
Upcoming event
Your device’s display screen provides information
about notifications and your device’s status. This list
identifies the symbols you’ll see on your device’s
display screen:
Music is playing
General notification (for example, sync error)
Storage card is low on free space
Status Bar – Notification Icons
Wi-Fi is on and wireless networks are
available
New Text or Multimedia Message
Data synchronizing – connected to HTC
Sync
New Voicemail
New location detected
New Gmail message
More (undisplayed) notifications
Call in progress (Voice Privacy locked)
Call in progress (Voice Privacy unlocked)
Missed call
New Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync or
POP3/IMAP email message
Problem with Text/Multimedia Message
delivery
New instant message from Google Talk
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Bar – Notification Icons
Compass needs orientation
Uploading data (animated)
Downloading data (animated)
Waiting to upload
Status Bar – Device Status Icons
Signal Strength
(More bars = stronger signal)
No Service
Device is “roaming” off the Nationwide Sprint
Network
Content downloaded
Sprint 3G data service (EVDO) available
Device connected to computer via USB
cable
Sprint 3G data service (EVDO) available and
active (with icon animation)
Storage card is safe to remove or storage
card is being prepared
Sprint 3G data service is currently
unavailable
No storage card installed in the device
Sprint 1xRTT network available
New tweet
Sprint 1xRTT network available and active
(with icon animation)
Updates available for an application
downloaded from Android Market
Sprint 1xRTT network is currently unavailable
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status Bar – Device Status Icons
Status Bar – Device Status Icons
Device’s location feature is on and available
for location-based services such as GPS
Navigation
Alarm set
Speakerphone on
Device’s location feature off and your
location is available only for 911
Wired microphone headset connected
Wired headset connected
Device microphone muted
Device speaker muted
Vibrate mode
Connected to Wi-Fi network
Connected to a 4G network
4G is on and 4G networks are available
Sprint Mobile Hotspot is on and is ready to
share its 4G connection
Shows current battery charge level
(Icon shown is fully charged)
Sprint Hotspot is on and is ready to share its
3G connection
Bluetooth on
Connected to Bluetooth device
Airplane mode
Notifications Panel
Notification icons report the arrival of new messages,
calendar events, alarms being set and ongoing
settings such as call forwarding being on or the current
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
call status. You can open the Notifications panel to
access message, reminder, or event notification tabs.
To open the Notifications panel:
When a new notification icon appears in the status bar,
press and hold the status bar and then drag it
downward to open the Notifications panel.
If you have several notifications, you can scroll down
the screen to view more notifications.
Tip: You can also open the Notifications panel from the
Home screen by pressing
and then tapping
Notifications.
Tap a notification
to open the related
application.
Press and hold,
and then drag up
to close the
Notifications panel.
To close the Notifications panel:
ᮣ
Press and hold the bottom bar of the Notifications
panel, and then drag it up the screen.
– or –
Press
.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notification LED
LED Status
Indication
The Notification LED located at the left end of the
earpiece provides information on the device status or
pending notifications.
Solid green
Battery is fully charged (when the
device is connected to the AC adapter
or a computer).
Solid amber
Battery is charging.
Flashing amber
Battery is low. (Battery power is below
14%.)
Flashing green
You have a pending notification (for
example, a new message or a missed
call).
Note: The indicators are listed in order of priority. For
example, if your device is connected to a power
adapter and is charging the battery, the LED will be
solid amber and will not switch to a flashing green light
even if there is a pending notification.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tip: Watch your device’s battery level indicator and charge
Battery and Charger
the battery before it runs out of power.
WARNING: Use only Sprint-approved or HTC-approved
batteries and chargers with your device. The
failure to use an Sprint-approved or
Installing the Battery
1. With the device turned off, insert a coin or other flat
object into the slot at the bottom of the battery
compartment cover and lift up gently to remove.
HTC-approved battery and charger may
increase the risk that your device will overheat,
catch fire, or explode, resulting in serious bodily
injury, death, or property damage.
Sprint-approved or HTC-approved batteries and
accessories can be found at Sprint Stores or through
HTC; or call 1-866-866-7509 to order. They’re also
available at www.sprint.com.
Battery Capacity
Your device is equipped with a rechargeable battery.
The battery provides up to 6 hours of continuous talk
time. For battery-saving tips, see “Power-Saving Tips”
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, browser use, and other variables may reduce
the battery’s talk and standby times.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Insert the contact end of the battery first, and then
gently push the battery into place.
Removing the Battery
1. Make sure the power is off so that you don’t lose
any stored numbers or messages.
2. Remove the battery compartment cover. (See
step 1 of “Installing the Battery.”)
3. Lift the battery out at the notch just below the
camera lens.
WARNING: Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-Ion
battery as you can be burned.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover and press
until it snaps into place, making sure all the locking
tabs are seated and there are no gaps around the
cover.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Plug the AC adapter in to an electrical outlet to
Charging the Battery
start charging the battery.
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If
your battery level becomes too low, your device
automatically turns off, and you will lose any
information you were just working on.
Charging is indicated by a solid amber light in the
Notification LED. As the battery is being charged while
the device is on, the charging battery icon (
) is
displayed in the status bar of the Home screen. After
the battery has been fully charged, the Notification LED
shows a solid green light and a full battery icon (
displays in the status bar of the Home screen.
Always use a Sprint-approved or HTC-approved
desktop charger, travel charger, or vehicle power
adapter to charge your battery.
)
Tip: With the Sprint-approved Li-ion battery, you can recharge
For more information about Notifications, see
the battery before it becomes completely run down.
1. Plug the USB connector of the AC adapter into the
charger/accessory jack on the lower left side of
your device.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
not release your finger until you have reached the
target position.
Getting Around Your Device
There are different ways to navigate around the your
device’s Home screen, menus, and application
screens.
Flick
Flicking the screen is similar to swiping, except that you
need to swipe your finger in light, quick strokes. This
finger gesture is always in a vertical direction, such as
when flicking the contacts or message list.
Tap
When you want to type using the onscreen keyboard,
select items onscreen such as application and settings
icons, or press onscreen buttons, simply tap them with
your finger.
Rotate
For most screens, you can automatically change the
screen orientation from portrait to landscape by turning
the device sideways. When entering text, you can turn
the device sideways to bring up a bigger keyboard.
See “Using the Onscreen Keyboard” for more details.
Press and hold
To open the available options for an item (for example,
contact or link in a Web page), simply press and hold
the item.
Note: The Auto-rotate check box in
>
> Settings >
Display needs to be selected for the screen orientation
Swipe or slide
to automatically change.
To swipe or slide means to quickly drag your finger
vertically or horizontally across the screen.
Drag
To drag, press and hold your finger with some pressure
before you start to move your finger. While dragging, do
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pinch and Spread
Making and Answering Calls
“Pinch” the screen using your thumb and
forefinger to zoom out or “spread” the screen to
zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page.
(Move fingers inward to zoom out and outward to
zoom in.)
Making Calls
There are several convenient methods to make a call
from your device.
Calling Using the Phone Dialer
You can dial a number directly in the Phone’s dialer. As
you enter the first digits of the phone number, Smart
Dial searchs for contacts that match. If you see the
number that you want, you can tap it to dial it
immediately without entering the rest of the phone
number.
Zooming out (pinch)
Zooming in (spread)
Note: Smart Dial will also search your contacts if you enter the
letters in the name of a contact using the letters on the
number pad. As you enter more letters or numbers, the
list shows only the corresponding matches.
Displaying Your Phone Number
ᮣ
Press
>
and tap Settings > About phone >
Phone identity. (Your phone number and other
information about your device and account will be
displayed.)
1. Press
and tap
.
2. Begin entering the first few digits or characters by
tapping the keys on the Phone keypad. If you enter
an incorrect digit, tap
entire number, press and hold
to erase it. To erase the
.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap the phone number or contact from the list.
For more information about text messages, see “Text
– or –
To call a different phone number associated with
the contact, tap the contact card icon at the right
side of the contact name. On the contact details
screen, tap the number you want to call.
Calling a Phone Number in an Email Message
While viewing an email message, you can tap a phone
number within the body of the email message to open
the Phone screen and dial the selected number.
Tip: Tap
to close the Phone keypad and to see if there
are more matching numbers or contacts. To browse
through the filtered list, flick through the list or slide
your finger up or down the list slowly.
Calling a Speed Dial Number
To call a stored speed dial number, press and hold a
number key. For information on setting up speed dial
Calling a Phone Number in a Text Message
While viewing a text message, you can place a call to a
number that is in the body of the message.
You can also place calls from your device using your
1. Press
and tap
> Messages.
2. Tap the message with the phone number, and
then tap the phone number.
3. On the Select link screen, tap the number you want
to call.
4. The Phone screen then opens, with the phone
number automatically filled in and ready to be
dialed. To place the call, tap Call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23
Using the Quiet Ring on Pickup Feature
Receiving Calls
Your device automatically reduces the ringer volume
when you pick up the device to answer calls.
When you receive a phone call from a contact, the
Incoming call screen appears and displays the caller
ID icon, name, and phone number of the calling party.
When you receive a phone call from someone who is
not stored in People, only the default caller ID icon and
phone number appear on the Incoming call screen.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Sound.
2. Scroll down the screen, and then select the Quiet
ring on pickup check box.
3. Press
.
Note: If your device is turned off, all calls automatically go to
voicemail.
Rejecting an Incoming Call
Answering an Incoming Call
ᮣ
If the display is on, tap Decline.
ᮣ
If the display is on, tap Answer.
ᮣ
If the display is off, the display will come on with
the Lock screen. Press
reject and send the call to your voicemail.
and then tap Decline to
ᮣ
If the display is off, the display will come on with the
Lock screen. Drag the bar down to answer the call.
Rejecting a Call and Sending a Text Message
Muting the Ringing Sound
You can automatically send a default text message to a
To mute the ringer without rejecting the call, you can do
any of the following:
caller and reject the incoming voice call. Press
and
tap Send message when you have an incoming call to
send the text message.
ᮣ
Press the volume button down.
ᮣ
Press
the Lock screen.)
and tap Mute. (You can do this even on
You can change the default text message by pressing
and tapping Phone settings > Edit default message
while on the Phone screen.
ᮣ
Place the device face down on a level surface.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tap the missed call number or contact name to open
the Call history. Missed calls are indicated by the
missed call icon ( ).
Answering a Roam Call With Call Guard Enabled
Call Guard is an option that helps you manage your
roaming charges when making or receiving calls while
outside the Nationwide Sprint Network. See “Roaming”
on page 164 for more information.
Calling Emergency Numbers
You can place calls to 911 even if the device’s screen is
locked or your account is restricted.
ᮣ
on page 165 for more information.)
To call the 911 emergency number when the device’s
screen is locked with a screen lock:
Note: If your device is turned off, all calls automatically go to
voicemail.
1. Unlock the screen. For more information, see
Ending a Call
ᮣ
Tap End call.
2. Tap Emergency call on the screen.
3. Tap
.
Missed Call Notification
When you do not answer an incoming call, you will see
To call the 911 emergency number normally or when your
account is restricted:
the missed call icon
in the status bar.
1. Unlock the screen. For more information, see
To see who the caller was, press and hold the status
bar, and then drag downward on the screen to open
the Notifications panel. The missed call number or
contact name is displayed.
2. Tap
3. Tap
on the Home screen.
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
The following options may be available through the
Options menu:
Note: When the device is completing a call, only the People,
Flash, and Speaker on options are available.
Enhanced 911 (E911) Information
This device features an embedded Global Positioning
System (GPS) chip necessary for utilizing E911
emergency location services where available.
ⅷ Add call to initiate a three-way call.
ⅷ People to display your contacts list.
When you place an emergency 911 call, the GPS
feature of your device seeks information to calculate
your approximate location. Depending on several
variables, including availability and access to satellite
signals, it may take up to 30 seconds or more to
determine and report your approximate location.
ⅷ Flash to accept another incoming call and put the
first caller on hold. Tap Flash again to talk to the first
caller.
ⅷ Mute to mute the microphone. Tap Unmute to unmute
Important: Always report your location to the 911 operator
when placing an emergency call. Some
designated emergency call takers, known as
Public Safety Answering Points (PSAPs), may not
be equipped to receive GPS location information
from your device.
the microphone.
ⅷ Speaker on or Speaker off to route the device’s audio
through the speaker or through the earpiece.
ᮣ
Tap Speaker On to route the device’s audio through
the speaker. (You can adjust the speaker volume
by pressing the volume button up or down.)
In-Call Options
ᮣ
Tap Speaker Off to use the device’s earpiece.
Pressing
during a call displays a list of available
WARNING: Because of higher volume levels, do not place
the device near your ear during speakerphone
use.
in-call features. To select an option, tap the option.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Tap Create new contact or Save to existing contact.
End-of-Call Options
After you receive a call from or make a call to a phone
number that is not in your People list, you can choose
to save the number to People. On the Phone screen,
5. Use the keyboard to enter the new contact name
and tap Save to save the new entry.
– or –
tap
at the right side of the number to add the new
Tap an existing contact name and tap Save to save
the new number.
number to People.
Tip: After receiving a call from a phone number that is not in
your People list, an options menu is briefly displayed to
allow you to save the number to People. On the options
menu, tap Yes, create new contact.
Finding a Phone Number
You can search People for entries by name.
1. Press
, tap
> People, and then press
.
Saving a Phone Number
2. Enter the first letter or letters of an entry. (The more
letters you enter, the more specific the search.)
You can store contacts entries in your device. Your
device automatically sorts People entries
alphabetically. (For more information, see “About
3. Tap the contact to display the contact’s phone
number(s).
Dialing From the People List
To save a number from standby mode:
1. Press
and tap
> People.
1. Press
and tap
.
2. Enter the phone number by tapping the keys on
2. Tap the entry you want to call.
the keypad.
3. Tap Call [Type of Number]. (For example, Call
mobile.)
3. Tap Save to People. (This button appears after
tapping six digits.)
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
number when it shows “Dialing” on the upper right
side of the screen.
Speed Dialing
Your device can store up to nine phone numbers in
speed dial locations.
Finding Speed Dial Numbers
1. Press
2. Press
and tap
.
To assign a speed dial number to a People entry:
and Speed dial.
1. Press
, tap
entry in People.
> People, and then tap an
3. Tap a speed dial entry to call the contact.
Tip: While on the Speed dial screen, press
and tap Add
to add new speed dial entries from People.
2. Press and tap More > Set speed dial.
3. Tap the list menu under Number to select a
number from the contact to assign to speed dial.
4. Tap the list menu under Location to assign the
number to a speed dial location.
5. Tap Save.
Note: If you assign a number to an already in-use speed dial
location, the new phone number will automatically
replace the previous speed dial assignment.
To call using Speed Dial:
ᮣ
Press and hold the appropriate key on the Phone
keypad for approximately two seconds.
The display confirms that you have dialed the
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the screen panel up with your thumbs to
reveal the slideout keyboard.
Dialing Sprint Services
Note: When the slideout keyboard is opened, the display
stays in landscape mode and you will not be able to
use the onscreen keyboard.
ᮣ
Dial the appropriate service number:
Ⅲ Customer Service –
Ⅲ Sprint 411 –
Ⅲ Account Information –
Ⅲ Sprint Operator –
Entering Text
Using the Slideout Keyboard
Open the slideout keyboard to type faster and more
conveniently with your fingers. The slideout keyboard
also comes with special keys that let you quickly
access menus and search your phone.
3. Start an app or select a field that requires entry of
text or numbers.
1. Hold the phone sideways, with the front panel
buttons to your right
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the letter keys to enter text. Press the
following keys to enter uppercase letters, numbers,
special characters, or symbols:
5. Press these keys to perform other actions:
Menu key (
)
● Instead of pressing the MENU button, press
the menu key to open the available menu
options for the current screen.
Shift key (
)
● Press once to capitalize the next letter you
select.
Search key (
)
● Press twice to lock the key and type a series of
uppercase letters (this works just like the Caps
Lock key on your computer keyboard). The
cursor changes when you lock the shift key.
● Instead of pressing the SEARCH button, press
the search key to open the search box and
then type what you want to search. Press the
Enter key to begin the search
● To unlock, press the shift key once again.
6. Use the navigation key to the right of the slideout
keyboard to move the cursor.
Function key (
)
● Press once to type the character shown
beside the letter or punctuation keys. For
example, if you need to type the dollar sign
Using the Onscreen Keyboard
When you start a program or select a box that requires
entry of text or numbers, the onscreen keyboard
becomes available. You can choose from three
keyboard layouts: QWERTY, Compact QWERTY, and
Phone Keypad.
($), press
(FN, D).
, and then press the D key
● Press twice to lock the key and type a series of
numbers and characters. The cursor changes
when you lock the function key.
Changing to Landscape Orientation
● To unlock, press the function key once again.
When entering text, you can choose to use the
landscape orientation of the onscreen keyboard by
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
turning the device sideways. This pops up a larger
keyboard that lets you type easily using two thumbs
Entering Text
Use the following keys while entering text using the
onscreen keyboard:
Note: The landscape orientation keyboard is not supported in
all applications.
Press and hold keys with gray characters at the
top to enter numbers, symbols, or accented
letters. The gray character displayed on the key is
the character that will be inserted when you press
and hold that key. Some keys have multiple
characters or accents associated with them.
Changing the Onscreen Keyboard Layout
You can choose from three different keyboard layouts
to suit your typing style. To change the keyboard layout,
do the following:
Shift key. Tap to capitalize the next letter you
enter. Tap twice to turn on caps lock.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Language &
keyboard > Touch Input.
Numeric key. Tap to switch to the numeric and
symbol keyboard.
2. Tap Keyboard types, and then select from the
following keyboard types:
Ⅲ QWERTY. This layout is similar to a desktop
computer keyboard. This is the default keyboard
layout.
Alphabet key. Tap to switch to the alphabetic
keyboard.
Enter key. Tap to create a new line.
Ⅲ Phone Keypad. This layout resembles a traditional
wireless phone keypad.
Backspace key. Tap to delete the previous
character. Press and hold to delete multiple
characters.
Ⅲ Compact QWERTY. This layout features two letters
on each key. The keys are slightly larger than on
the full QWERTY layout.
Voice input key. Tap to speak the words you want
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter a word in predictive mode, do any of the
following:
Tap to hide the onscreen keyboard.
ⅷ If you see the word you want highlighted in green or
orange, you can simply tap the space bar to insert
the word into your text.
Tap to toggle between Multitap and XT9
predictive modes when using the Compact
QWERTY or Phone Keypad layout. (See
“Predictive Text” for details.)
ⅷ If you see the word you want shown in the
suggestions before you have finished typing the
entire word, tap the word to insert it into your text.
Predictive Text
ⅷ If an arrow is shown to the right of the suggestion list,
tap the arrow to see more suggestions.
The onscreen keyboard has predictive text to help you
type quickly and accurately. Predictive text input is
enabled by default, and word suggestions are
displayed as you type.
Adding a Word to the Predictive Text Dictionary
Your device comes with a list of words that it references
for predictive text suggestions. Sometimes you may
need to add a word to the predictive text dictionary, for
example a name or a specialized technical word. While
entering text using the QWERTY keyboard layout, if you
tap any word on the suggestion list, it is automatically
added to the predictive text dictionary if it was not in the
dictionary already.
To manually add a word to the predictive text dictionary:
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Language &
keyboard > Touch Input > Personal dictionary.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tap Add new.
Backing up Your Personal Dictionary to Your
Storage Card
3. Enter the word to add, and then tap OK.
You can use your microSD storage card to back up the
new words you’ve added to your personal dictionary.
Editing or Deleting a Word in Your Personal
Dictionary
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Language &
keyboard > Touch Input.
You can edit or remove words that you previously
added to the predictive text dictionary.
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary >
Copy to storage card.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Language &
keyboard > Touch Input > Personal dictionary.
3. When prompted, tap OK.
2. To edit a word, tap the word, enter your changes,
and then tap OK.
Restoring Your Personal Dictionary from Your
Storage Card
– or –
To delete a word, tap the X icon to the right of the
word.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Language &
keyboard > Touch Input.
2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary >
Restore from storage card.
3. When prompted, tap OK.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
Ⅲ Hardware QWERTY
Adjusting Touch Input Settings
●
Prediction: Enable the word prediction feature.
ᮣ
Press
>
, and tap Settings > Language &
●
Spell correction: Correct typographical errors
by selecting from a list of possible words that
reflect the characters of the keys you have
tapped as well as characters of nearby keys.
keyboard > Touch Input.
Touch Input Settings
ⅷ Keyboard types lets you select the keyboard layout to
use. You can choose from QWERTY, Phone Keypad,
or Compact QWERTY.
Ⅲ Phone keypad & compact QWERTY
●
Spell correction: Correct typographical errors
by selecting from a list of possible words that
reflect the characters of the keys you have
tapped as well as characters of nearby keys.
ⅷ International keyboard lets you select the language
layout of the keyboard.
ⅷ Text input lets you set text input options when
entering text, calibrate the keyboard, and set sound
or vibration feedback whenever you tap a key.
●
Word completion: Select from a list of possible
combinations based on the characters that
appear on the keys that you tapped.
Ⅲ QWERTY
Ⅲ Other settings
●
Prediction: Enable the word prediction feature.
●
Sound feedback: Cause keys to audibly click
●
Spell correction: Correct typographical errors
by selecting from a list of possible words
based on the keys you have tapped as well as
neighboring keys.
when tapped.
●
Vibrate when typing: Cause keys to vibrate
when tapped.
Ⅲ Finger touch precision
●
Calibration tool: Lets you recalibrate the
keyboard if you feel that the keys are not
responding accurately to your taps.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Reset calibration: Reset the calibration back to
factory default.
Home Screen
ⅷ Chinese Text input lets you set options when entering
text in Chinese.
The Home screen is the starting point for many
applications and functions. The Home screen allows
you to add items like application icons, shortcuts,
folders, and widgets to give you instant access to
information and applications.
Ⅲ Pinyin: Choose Traditional Chinese or Simplified
Chinese. In Simplified Chinese, you can enable
Fuzzy Pinyin pairs.
Ⅲ Stroke: Choose Traditional Chinese or Simplified
Chinese mode.
1
ⅷ Tutorial lets you go through tutorials to learn how to
use the onscreen keyboard features.
ⅷ Personal dictionary lets you add, edit, or remove
words in the predictive text dictionary. For more
information, see “Adding a Word to the Predictive
2
5
3
4
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Status Bar: Displays device status and notification
13 for a list of icons you will see on the status bar.
There are six extended screens besides the main
Home screen.
2. Application icon: Tap to open the related
application.
3. All apps: Tap to open the All apps screen. The All
apps screen holds all applications on your device.
4. Add to Home: Tap to add shortcuts, widgets, and
folders to the Home screen or to an extended
screen.
5. Phone: Tap to open the Phone screen to make
calls.
Tip: While in any application, press
to go back to the
Home screen.
Extended Screens
Besides the Home screen, you can access six
additional screens to provide more space for adding
icons, widgets, and more. Press
across the screen to move from the Home screen to an
extended screen.
, and then drag
Note: You cannot add more screens.
Tip: While on an extended screen, press
to return to the
Home screen.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To go directly to a particular screen:
drag the icon to an empty area on the screen,
and then release it.
1. From any screen, pinch the screen to display
thumbnail images of all screens.
Ⅲ Shortcut: Add shortcuts to bookmarked Web
page, a favorite contact, a Gmail™ label, a music
playlist, and more.
Tip: On the Home screen, you can press
to show the
thumbnail overview.
Ⅲ Folder: Add a folder where you can organize
screen items. Add a shortcut to all your contacts,
contacts with phone numbers, or starred contacts.
Contact details are automatically updated when
there are changes in the source.
2. Tap the screen you want to open.
Customizing the Home Screen
To add a Home screen item:
Customize any screen by adding application shortcuts
and widgets. You can also use preset widgets from a
1. Press
and tap
.
Scene. To use a Scene, press
Scenes.
>
and tap
Note: You can also press and hold an empty area on the
Home screen.
Tip: You can also create and save your custom scene. (See
2. On the Add to Home screen, tap the item you want
to add to the Home screen or an extended screen:
“Creating and Saving a Custom Scene” for details.)
To add a widget:
Ⅲ Widget: Add HTC or Android™ widgets to a
screen such as a clock, calendar, mail, people,
Footprints, and more.
1. Press
and tap
.
2. In the Add to Home options menu, tap Widget.
Ⅲ App: Add shortcuts to applications on your phone.
To quickly add an application shortcut that is on
the All apps screen to a screen, press and hold
an application icon. When the device vibrates,
3. Select a widget to add to a screen, and then select
a layout to use, when available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
To remove a screen item:
Note: Most HTC widgets offer various layouts and sizes to fit
your needs.
1. Press and hold the item on the screen you want to
remove to activate Edit mode.
4. Tap Select.
Note: When Edit mode is activated, the item expands and the
Note: You may need to slide to another screen or remove a
widget on the screen first if there is no space to place
the new widget.
device vibrates.
2. Drag the icon to
into ).
(
changes
To reposition a screen item:
1. Press and hold the item on the Home screen you
want to reposition to activate Edit mode.
3. Release when the dragged icon and
both turn red.
Note: When Edit mode is activated, the item expands and the
To create a folder and add items to it:
device vibrates.
You can create folders on a screen to hold application
icons or shortcuts.
2. Without lifting your finger, drag the icon to the
position you want on the screen, and then release
it.
1. Press
>
and tap Add to Home > Folder >
New folder. A new folder appears on the screen.
Note: To move an item from the Home screen to an
extended screen, press and hold the item and then
drag it to the left or right edge of the screen until the
display shifts to the extended screen. Position the item
on the screen, and then release it.
2. Press and hold an application icon or a shortcut
on the screen to activate Edit mode, and then drag
it on top of the folder.
To access the items inside a folder, tap the folder to
open it and then tap the icon of the application or
shortcut you want to open.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: To delete a folder, follow the same procedure as you
would for removing a screen item.
To rename a folder:
1. Tap the folder to open it.
2. Press and hold the folder’s title bar to open the
Rename folder dialog box.
3. Enter the Folder name and then tap OK.
Creating and Saving a Custom Scene
Create your own custom scene and save it on your
device.
1. Customize the Home and extended screens by
adding or removing widgets or application
shortcuts, repositioning items, or changing the
wallpaper.
2. After customizing, press
and tap Scenes.
3. On the Choose a scene options menu, select
Current (unsaved) and tap Save.
4. Enter the Scene name and tap Done.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
Personalization Settings
2B. Settings
Scenes
Selecting a Scene
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Customize your device’s Home and extended screens’
appearance by selecting a scene to reflect your
lifestyle. Scenes are preset screen layouts that you can
quickly apply.
ᮣ
Press
to apply it.
>
, tap Scenes, and then tap a scene
To save a custom scene:
ᮣ
Customize the Home and extended screens by
changing the wallpaper and adding widgets, press
, and then tap Scenes > Current (unsaved) >
Save. Enter the Scene name and then tap Done.
Tip: You can rename or delete a custom scene. On the
Settings screen, tap Personalize > Scenes, and then
press and hold a custom scene.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Renaming or Deleting a Scene
Sound Settings
You can rename or delete a custom scene. To learn
how to create a custom scene, see “Creating and
Phone Ring Tone
Select a default ring tone for incoming calls.
1. Press
Scenes.
>
and tap Settings > Personalize >
Selecting the Default Ring Tone
2. Press and hold the custom scene (under My
scenes) and tap Rename or Delete.
Your device provides a variety of ring tones that you
can set as the default ring tone of your device.
3. Tap Rename, enter the new Scene name, and then
tap Done.
1. Press
ringtone.
>
and tap Settings > Sound > Phone
– or –
2. Tap the ring tone you want to use, and then tap
OK. The ring tone briefly plays when selected.
Tap Delete > OK.
Note: You can use *.wav, *.mid, *.mp3, *.wma, or other types
of sound files that you have downloaded from the
Internet or copied from your computer as ring tones.
Note: You cannot rename or delete a preset scene.
Home Screen Wallpaper
details.
Notification Sound
Select a default sound for notifications.
Default Ring Tone
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Default Notification Sound
Vibrate
Your device provides a variety of sounds that you can
set as the default sound for notifications.
To set your device to vibrate instead of making any
sounds:
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Sound >
Notification sound.
ᮣ
Press the volume button down in standby mode
until you see the image below on the screen.
2. Tap the sound you want to use, and then tap OK.
The sound plays when selected.
Adjusting the Device’s Volume Settings
Adjust your device’s volume settings to suit your needs
and your environment.
The device vibrates and the vibrate mode icon (
appears on the status bar.
)
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Sound.
To set your device to always vibrate in addition to any
ringer settings:
2. Tap Volume.
3. Drag the volume sliders on the screen to adjust the
ringtone, media, alarm, or notification volume and
then tap OK.
1. Press
2. Select the Vibrate check box.
3. Press
>
and tap Settings > Sound.
.
Note: You can adjust the ringer volume in standby mode (or
the earpiece volume during a call) by pressing the
volume button up or down.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Silence All
Alert Notification
The Silence All option allows you to mute all sounds
without turning your device off.
Set your device to alert you with an audible tone when
you are not within the Sprint coverage area or when
you make an emergency call.
To activate Silence All:
1. Press
2. Tap Emergency tone, and then tap Alert.
3. Press
>
and tap Settings > Sound.
ᮣ
Press the volume button down in standby mode
until you see the image below on the screen.
.
Enabling Touch Tones
You can set the device to play a sound when you are
using the phone keypad or tapping the screen.
The Silence All mode icon ( ) appears on the status
bar.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Sound.
2. Do any or all of the following:
To deactivate Silence All:
Ⅲ Select the Audible selection check box to set the
device to play a sound every time you tap the
screen.
ᮣ
Press the volume button up repeatedly to select a
volume level.
Ⅲ Tap Audible touch tones, and then tap Long tones
or Short tones to set the device to play a sound
when you are using the phone keypad.
3. Press
.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Display Screen
Display Settings
Changing the device’s display screen wallpaper with a
preset wallpaper or your favorite photo is a quick and
easy way to change the feel of your device and give it a
fresh look. Browse the collection of wallpapers
included in your device or choose from photos that you
have taken with the camera. You can also change to an
animated wallpaper.
Changing the Screen Timeout Period
After a period of inactivity, the device screen turns off to
conserve battery power. You can set the idle time
before the screen turns off.
1. Press
timeout.
>
and tap Settings > Display > Screen
1. Press
>
and tap Wallpaper.
2. Tap the time before the screen turns off.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Tap Live wallpapers to choose from preset
animated wallpapers.
Note: Extended screen timeout periods reduce the battery’s
talk and standby times.
Ⅲ Tap HTC wallpapers to use a preset image.
Ⅲ Tap Gallery to use a picture that you have
captured using the camera or copied to your
device as a wallpaper. You can crop the picture
before setting it as a wallpaper.
Tip: To turn off and lock the screen quickly, press
.
3. Tap Save or Set wallpaper.
After changing the wallpaper, remember to save it to
the scene that you created or save it as a new scene.
For more information, see “Creating and Saving a
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Brightness
Note: Not all application screens support automatic rotation.
By default, the screen brightness automatically adjusts
depending on the surrounding lighting conditions.
The screen orientation automatically changes to
landscape mode when you turn the device
counterclockwise 90 degrees. If you turn the device
clockwise 90 degrees, the screen orientation will not
change to landscape mode.
To manually adjust screen brightness
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Display.
2. Tap Brightness and then clear the Automatic
brightness check box.
Recalibrating the Screen
Recalibrate the screen if you feel that the screen
orientation does not respond properly to the way you
hold the device.
3. Drag the slider to adjust the brightness.
4. Tap OK.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Display >
G-Sensor calibration.
Changing the Screen Orientation
By default, the screen orientation automatically
changes when the device is rotated. To disable
automatic screen orientation:
2. Place the device on a flat surface and then tap
Calibrate.
3. After the recalibration process, tap OK.
1. Press
2. Clear the Auto-rotate screen check box and
press
>
and tap Settings > Display.
.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you turn the Location setting feature on, the
device displays the icon on the status bar. When
Location Settings
you turn Location setting off, the device displays the
icon.
Your device is equipped with a Location feature for use
in connection with location-based services.
The Location feature allows the network to detect your
position. Turning Location off will hide your location
from everyone except 911.
Messaging Settings
Your device’s advanced messaging capabilities let you
send and receive many different kinds of text
messages without placing a voice call. (For more
information, see “Accessing Email Messages” on
Note: Turning Location on will allow the network to detect
your position using GPS technology, making some
Sprint applications and services easier to use. Turning
Location off will disable the GPS location function for
all purposes except 911, but will not hide your general
location based on the cell site serving your call. No
application or service may use your location without
your request or permission. GPS-enhanced 911 is not
available in all areas.
Messaging settings allow you to decide how you would
like to be notified of new messages and create your
own preset messages.
Setting Message Notification
To enable your device’s Location setting feature:
When you receive a message, your device notifies you
by displaying an icon on your display screen. You can
also choose to vibrate the device and have the screen
flash when you receive a message.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Location >
Location setting.
2. Read the Location disclaimer and then tap ON.
3. Press
.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To display a notification and vibrate the device when you
receive a message:
To edit or delete a preset message:
1. Press and tap > Messages > New
message.
2. Tap the “Tap to compose” text box.
3. Press and tap Quick text. (You will see the list of
preset messages.)
4. Press and:
Tap Edit, tap the message you want to edit, edit the
1. Press
2. Press
and tap
> Messages.
and then tap Settings.
3. Scroll down the screen and select the Play
notification sound and Vibrate check boxes.
Note: Tap Notification sound to choose a notification sound.
4. Press
To flash the screen when you receive a message:
and tap Settings > Display >
.
message, and then tap
.
– or –
1. Press
>
Tap Delete, select the message you want to delete,
and tap OK. (Tap Cancel to cancel the deletion.)
Notification flash.
2. Select the SMS/MMS check box and then
press
.
Managing Preset Messages
Your device is loaded with nine preset messages to
help make sending text messages easier. Customize or
delete these messages, such as “Where are you?,”
“Let’s catch up soon,” and “Just checking in” to suit
your needs, or add your own messages to the list.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To add a new preset message:
1. Press and tap > Messages > New
message.
2. Tap the “Tap to compose” text box.
3. Press and tap Quick text. (You will see the list of
preset messages.)
To quickly turn Airplane Mode on or off:
Press and hold , and then tap Airplane
mode in Phone options. While in Airplane Mode,
the status bar will display
To turn Airplane Mode on or off in Settings:
1. Press and tap Settings > Wireless &
networks.
ᮣ
.
>
4. To add a new message, press
5. Enter your message and tap
and tap Insert.
2. Select the Airplane mode check box and press
While in Airplane Mode, the status bar will
.
. (Your new
message will be added to the beginning of the list.)
display
.
Airplane Mode
TTY Use With Sprint Service
Airplane Mode allows you to use many of your device’s
features, such as Gallery, Camera, and Music, when
you are on an airplane or in any other area where
making or receiving calls or data is prohibited. When
you set your device to Airplane Mode, it cannot send or
receive any calls or access online information.
A TTY (teletypewriter, also known as a TDD or Text
Telephone) is a telecommunications device that allows
people who are deaf, hard of hearing, or who have
speech or language disabilities, to communicate by
telephone.
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices.
Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device
to ensure that it supports digital wireless transmission.
Your device and TTY device will connect using a
special cable that plugs into your device’s headset
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
jack. If this cable was not provided with your TTY
device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to
purchase the connector cable.
WARNING: 911 Emergency Calling
Sprint recommends that TTY users make
emergency calls by other means, including
Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS),
analog cellular, and landline communications.
Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted
when received by public safety answering points
(PSAPs), rendering some communications
unintelligible. The problem encountered appears
related to TTY equipment or software used by
PSAPs. This matter has been brought to the
attention of the FCC, and the wireless industry
and the PSAP community are currently working
to resolve this.
When establishing your Sprint service, please call
Sprint Customer Service using the state
Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by first
dialing
. Then provide the
state TRS with this number: 866-727-4889.
To turn TTY Mode on or off:
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Call > TTY mode.
2. Tap TTY Full, TTY HCO, or TTY VCO to turn TTY
mode on.
– or –
Tap TTY Off to turn TTY mode off.
Note: When enabled, TTY mode may impair the audio
quality of non-TTY devices connected to the headset
jack.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Settings
Note: You must slide your finger on the screen to create the
pattern and not tap individual dots.
6. The device records the pattern. Tap Continue.
Protecting Your Device with a Screen Lock
7. When prompted, draw the screen unlock pattern
again, and then tap Confirm.
Tip: Clear the Use visible pattern check box if you do not
want the unlock pattern to display on the screen when
you unlock it.
You can increase the security of your device by
creating a screen lock. When enabled, you have to
draw the correct unlock pattern on the screen, enter the
correct PIN, or enter the correct password to unlock the
device’s control keys, buttons, and touchscreen.
To create and enable the screen unlock pattern:
Note: To change your unlock screen pattern, press
, and then tap Settings > Security > Change
unlock pattern.
>
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Security > Set up
screen lock.
If you fail to draw the correct unlock pattern on the
screen after five attempts, you will be prompted to wait
for 30 seconds before you can try again.
2. Tap Pattern.
3. Read the information on the screen and tap Next.
4. Study the example pattern on the screen, and then
tap Next.
To create and enable a screen unlock PIN:
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Security > Set up
5. Draw the screen unlock pattern by connecting at
least four dots in a vertical, horizontal, or diagonal
direction. Lift your finger from the screen when
finished.
screen lock.
2. Tap PIN.
3. Enter a PIN, tap OK, and then enter your PIN again
to confirm it.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you fail to enter the correct PIN after five attempts, you
will be prompted to wait for 30 seconds before you can
try again.
Updating Your Device’s System Software
From time to time, system software updates for your
device may be available. Your device can automatically
check and notify you if an update is available. You can
download and install the update to your device.
Depending on the type of update, the update may
erase all your personal data and customized settings,
and it could also remove any programs you have
installed. Make sure that you have backed up the
information and files you want to keep.
To create and enable a screen unlock password:
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Security > Set up
screen lock.
2. Tap Password.
3. Enter a password, tap Continue, and then enter
your password again to confirm it.
Note: Checking and downloading system software updates
If you fail to enter the correct password after five
attempts, you will be prompted to wait for 30 seconds
before you can try again.
may incur additional data transfer fees.
To check for phone system software updates manually
To disable the screen lock:
1. Press
>
and then tap Settings > System
updates > HTC software update.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Security >
Change screen lock.
2. On the System software updates screen, tap
Check now.
2. Tap None.
3. Draw your unlock screen pattern, enter your PIN, or
enter your password, and then tap Continue.
If you fail to enter the correct password after five
attempts, you will be prompted to wait for 30 seconds
before you can try again.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting Your Device
Security Features for Data Services
Resetting the device deletes all data, including
downloaded applications, and resets the device back
to its initial state — the state before you turned on the
device for the first time.
Enabling and Disabling Data Services
You can disable data services without turning off your
device; however, you will not have access to all data
services, including Web and messaging. Disabling
data services will avoid any charges associated with
these services. While signed out, you can still place or
receive phone calls, check voicemail, and use other
voice services. You may enable data services again at
any time.
Important: Make sure to back up important data you have
on the device before you reset it.
ᮣ
Press
>
and tap Settings > Privacy > Factory
data reset > Reset phone.
To reset the device using the device keys:
To enable or disable data services:
1. With the device turned off, press and hold the
volume button down, and then press
.
1. Press
networks.
>
and tap Settings > Wireless &
2. When the device’s display turns on, release the
volume button.
2. Select the Mobile network check box to enable
data services.
3. Use the volume button to select CLEAR STORAGE,
– or –
and then press
. (All data will be deleted
from the device.)
Clear the Mobile network check box to disable data
services.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop synchronization:
Data Synchronization Settings
ᮣ
When the device is synchronizing, tap Cancel sync
to stop synchronization.
Synchronizing Google Apps
Synchronizing Exchange ActiveSync
Your device’s Google Apps™, such as Gmail, Calendar,
and Contacts, give you access to the same personal
information (email messages, events, and contacts)
that you add, view, and edit on your computer using
Gmail or Google Calendar. Synchronize the Google
Apps you want to keep information up-to-date.
You can synchronize your device with your company’s
Microsoft Exchange Server to access your device’s
Exchange Server account’s email, contacts, and
calendar events.
Note: You need to have an Exchange ActiveSync account
Note: You need to be signed in to your Google account to
set up on your device. See “Email” on page 184.
synchronize Google Apps.
To select which Exchange ActiveSync items to
synchronize:
To select which Google Apps to synchronize:
1. Press
sync.
>
and then tap Settings > Accounts &
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Accounts &
sync > Exchange ActiveSync.
Tip: Select the Auto-sync check box to automatically
synchronize all applications. When the Auto-sync check
box is cleared, you can synchronize individual
applications manually by selecting their respective check
boxes.
2. Select the Exchange ActiveSync items you want to
synchronize.
To change the synchronization schedule:
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Accounts &
sync > Exchange ActiveSync > Schedule.
2. Tap Google.
3. Select the Google Apps you want to synchronize.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tap the time interval at which the device will check
for new data.
Social Network Settings
To manually start synchronization:
Logging in to and Synchronizing Your
Social Network Accounts
ᮣ
On the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync screen, tap
Sync now.
If you set up a Facebook for HTC Sense, Flickr, or
Twitter account when you first turned on your device,
you can quickly login and synchronize information
such as status messages and friends lists between
your device and your social network accounts on the
Web.
To change account settings:
1. Press and tap Settings > Accounts & sync
>
> Exchange ActiveSync > Account settings.
2. Change the general settings, mail, and calendar
settings according to your preference.
Note: You need to have an existing Facebook, Flickr, or
3. Press
.
Twitter account.
To log in to your Facebook or Twitter account:
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap Facebook for HTC Sense or Twitter.
3. Enter your user name and password and then tap
Sign in.
To log in to your Flickr account:
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap Add account > Flickr.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Enter your Yahoo! ID and password and tap Sign
in.
Application Settings
4. Follow the screen instructions to log in to your
Allowing Installation of Third-Party
Programs
Flickr account.
To synchronize your Facebook or Twitter account:
By default, you can install only programs and games
downloaded from the Android Market.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
2. Tap Facebook for HTC Sense or Twitter.
3. Tap Sync now.
To install third-party programs on the device:
ᮣ
Press
>
, tap Settings > Applications, and
To remove a social network account:
then select the Unknown sources check box.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
To uninstall third-party programs on the device:
and tap Settings > Applications >
2. Tap the account you want to remove.
3. Tap Remove account.
1. Press
>
Manage applications.
2. On the Manage applications screen, tap the
Downloaded, Running, All, or On SD card tab, and
then tap the application you want to uninstall.
Tip: On the Social Networks screen, press
and tap Log
out all to log out from all the social network accounts.
3. On the Application info screen, tap Uninstall.
Note: You cannot uninstall programs that are preinstalled on
the device.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing Application Cache and Data
Free up storage space and device memory by deleting
application cache and data.
Date & Time Settings
Setting Local Date, Time Zone, and Time
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Applications >
Manage applications.
By default, your device automatically uses the
network-provided date, time zone, and time. However,
you can set the date, time zone, and time manually if
you need to.
2. In the Manage applications list, tap the
Downloaded, Running, All, or On SD card tab, and
then tap the application whose cache or data you
want to delete.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Date & time.
2. Clear the Automatic check box.
Tip: Press
to bring up sort and filter options.
3. Tap Set date. In the Change date window, scroll the
date wheel to change the date. Tap Done when
finished.
3. In the Application info screen, tap Clear data or
Clear cache.
4. Tap Select time zone, and then select the time zone
in the list. Scroll down the list to view more time
zones.
5. Tap Set time. In the time window, scroll the time
wheel to adjust the time. Tap Done when finished.
6. Select the Use 24-hour format check box to toggle
between using a 12-hour or 24-hour time format.
7. Tap Select date format, and then select how you
want dates to display on your device. The selected
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
date format also applies to the date displayed in
the Alarm Clock.
Managing Your Device’s Wireless Functions
To save battery life, you can disable the 4G, Bluetooth,
GPS, Sprint Hotspot, and Wi-Fi functions of the device
when not in use.
Power-Saving Tips
To change wireless settings:
Adjusting the Display Brightness and
ᮣ
Press
>
and then tap Settings > Wireless &
Screen On-Time
networks. Disable any wireless functions (for
example, Bluetooth or Wi-Fi) that are not in use.
ⅷ Press
>
, tap Settings > Display > Brightness,
and then modify the backlight setting as desired. For
more information, see “Display Settings” on page 44.
To change GPS settings:
Press and then tap Settings > Location.
Disable the GPS by unchecking Use GPS satellites.
To add a wireless function widget to your Home screen:
Press and tap > Add to Home > Widget >
ᮣ
>
– or –
Add the Power Control widget to the home screen to
easily adjust the screen brightness. Press
and tap
> Add to Home > Widget > Power Control.
ᮣ
ⅷ Decrease the time before the screen turns off when
Settings. Tap the widget you would like to add (for
example, 4G, Bluetooth, GPS, Hotspot, or Wi-Fi).
the device is idle. Press
Display > Screen timeout, and then select a timeout
>
, tap Settings >
value.
ⅷ To turn off the screen, press
. The device will
continue to function.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Email Synchronization Schedule
If you use the device to send and receive email, you
can set your email account to download email more or
less frequently as desired.
1. Press
and tap
> Mail.
2. If you have set up multiple email accounts on your
device, switch to the email account that you want
to edit by tapping
.
3. In the Inbox, press
and tap More > Settings >
Send & Receive > Schedule.
4. In the Frequency section, tap Peak times or Off-
peak times, and then select an email download
frequency.
|
Note: The more frequently your device checks for new
messages, the more quickly the battery will run down.
Tip: You can also close applications that are not in use to
conserve battery power. To do so, press
>
, and
then tap Settings > Applications > Manage
Applications. Tap the Running tab, tap the application
you would like to close, and then tap Force stop.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing History
2C. History
History is a list of phone numbers (or People entries)
for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. History
makes redialing a number fast and easy. It is
continually updated as your device automatically adds
new numbers to the beginning of the list.
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Each entry contains the phone number (if it is
available) and People entry name (if the number is in
People). Duplicate calls (same number and type of
call) may only appear once on the list.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To view History:
Tip: Press and hold an entry in the Call history list to open the
options menu where you can select to view the contact
information (if number is stored in People), edit the
number before you redial, send a text message, or delete
the entry from the Call history list.
1. Press
and tap
> People.
2. Tap the Call history tab
.
3. Tap
at the right side of a number of contact to
view the call history for that number or contact.
Saving a Number From History
Note: History records only calls that occur while the device is
turned on. If a call is received while your device is
turned off, it will not be included in History.
If the phone number of a person who called is not in
People, you can choose to save the number after you
hang up.
Making a Call From History
1. Press
and tap
> People.
1. Press
and tap
> People.
2. Tap the Call history tab
.
2. Tap the Call history tab
.
3. Press and hold the received call and then tap Save
to contacts on the options menu.
3. Tap an entry on the Call history list to place a call
to that entry.
Note: You cannot make calls from History to entries identified
as No ID or Restricted.
4. The phone number is automatically added to the
Mobile box in the Number section. Enter the name
and other contact information.
Tip: To store the number as another type (for example, home
number), tap the Mobile button.
5. Scroll down the screen and tap Save.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you have saved the number, your device displays
the new People entry. (See “Displaying an Entry in
Note: You cannot save phone numbers already in People or
from calls identified as No ID or Restricted.
Erasing History
To erase a History entry:
1. Press
and tap
> People.
2. Tap the Call history tab
.
Prepending a Number From History
3. Press and hold the entry you want to delete and
tap Delete from call history.
If you need to make a call from History and you are
outside your local area code, you can add the
appropriate prefix by prepending the number.
To erase all History entries:
1. Press
2. Tap the Call history tab
3. Press and tap Delete all.
and tap
> People.
1. Press
and tap
> People.
.
2. Tap the Call history tab
.
3. Press and hold the entry you want to call and tap
Edit number before calling.
4. Enter the prefix and tap
to call the
number.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About People
In People, you can easily manage your
2D. Contacts
communications with contacts through phone,
messaging, and email. You can also view updates on
their Facebook, Flickr, and Twitter accounts.
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ If you are synchronizing contacts with your Google
account, with your PC, or with an Exchange Server, any
contacts stored in those accounts are displayed in
People. You can also synchronize contacts from your
Facebook account in People.
Ways of Getting Contacts Into Your Device
You can add contacts to your device from:
Ⅲ Gmail contacts that are imported to your device
after you set up a Google Account. For more
information, see “Gmail” on page 190.
Ⅲ Exchange ActiveSync Server For more information,
Ⅲ Contacts on your computer For more information,
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. All gives you access to all contacts on your device,
including Google contacts, Exchange ActiveSync
contacts, Phone contacts, and Facebook contacts.
You can also use this tab to open or update My
contact card. For more information, see “Setting Up
To open People:
Press and tap
to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
ᮣ
> People. (You may need
2. Groups lets you assign contacts to groups so you
can easily send an SMS, MMS, or email message
to a whole group. For more information, see
Using the People Screen
The People screen gives you easy access to all your
contacts, as well as even faster access to the people
and groups of people you contact most often.
3. Online directories lets you search for contacts on
your online directories such as your Exchange
ActiveSync or Facebook account to copy to your
device. For more information, see “Connecting with
The People screen has the following tabs:
4. Call history lists all your dialed numbers and
received and missed calls. For more information,
1
2
3
4
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up My Contact Card
Your Contacts List
My contact card provides a convenient way to store your
personal contact information so that you can easily
send it using MMS, email, or Bluetooth.
The All tab of the People screen shows all your
contacts, including Google contacts, Exchange
ActiveSync contacts, Phone contacts, and Facebook
contacts.
Note: If you signed in to your Google Account and Facebook
account when you first set up the device, your contacts
from those accounts will appear in the contacts list
when you open People.
To set up My contact card:
1. On the All tab of the People screen, tap Me.
Tip: If you are logged in to your Facebook account through
Facebook for HTC Sense, instead of Me, you will see the
name you use in Facebook.
2. Enter your name and contact details.
3. Tap Save.
1
6
5
2
3
4
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Add a contact.
Adding a New People Entry
2. Edit or update My Contact Card.
1. On the All tab, tap Add contact at the top of the
3. Tap a contact to open the contact details for that
screen.
contact.
Note: If you have set up a Google Account or an Exchange
ActiveSync email account, the Contact type option
appears to determine which account the contact will
sync with.
4. The green icon ( ) appears when the contact:
Ⅲ Has sent you a new text or email message, or
tried to call you but you missed the call.
Ⅲ Has updated their Facebook profile or has added
photos on Flickr or Facebook.
2. Tap the Name box, enter the first and last name of
the contact, and choose the order in which to
display the names. Tap OK.
Ⅲ Has upcoming Facebook events.
3. Enter the contact information in the boxes
provided.
5. The Facebook status appears when you link the
contact to their Facebook account.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the screen and tap Save.
6. Tap the photo or icon to open a menu where you
can quickly choose how to communicate with the
contact. Depending on the contact information
stored, you can call, send a text or email message,
see the contact’s Facebook profile, and locate the
contact’s address in Google Maps.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After saving the number, your device displays the new
entry in the contacts list.
5. Use the keyboard to enter the new contact name
and tap Save to save the new entry.
Tip: ICE - In Case of Emergency
– or –
To make it easier for emergency personnel to identify
important contacts, you can list your local emergency
contacts under “ICE” in your phone’s Contacts list. For
example, if your mother is your primary emergency
contact, list her as “ICE-Mom” in your Contacts. To list
more than one emergency contact, use “ICE1-___,”
“ICE2-___,” etc.
Tap an existing contact name and tap Save to save
the new number.
Using the Contact Details Screen
When you tap a contact on the People screen, the
Contact Details screen opens, showing you the
information stored for that contact, exchanged
messages and phone calls with that contact, Facebook
notifications, and more.
Saving a Phone Number
To save a number from standby mode:
The Contact Details screen has the following tabs:
1. Press
and tap
.
2. Enter the phone number by tapping the keys on
the keypad.
3. Tap Save to People. (This button appears after
1
2
3
4
5
6
tapping six digits.)
1. Details shows the information you have stored for
the contact, and allows you to get in touch with the
contact directly by tapping any of the displayed
methods. For example, if the contact has a stored
work phone number, tap Call Work to call that
4. Tap Add contact or Save to existing contact.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
number. You can also add one of the contact’s
phone numbers as a speed dial number. For more
information, see “Speed Dialing” on page 28.
6. Call history lists all your incoming, outgoing, and
missed calls to and from the contact. Tap a list item
to call the contact using the displayed number.
2. Messages shows your exchanged SMS messages
with the contact. Tap a message to view it. To send
a new message, tap New message. For more
information about messages, see “Text Messaging
Merging Entries in People
Merge duplicated entries in People to avoid clutter and
confusion. If the same contact appears in your Phone,
Google, and Facebook accounts, you can merge the
contact information into one entry.
3. Mail shows email messages you have received
from the contact. Tap an email message to view it.
To send a new email message, tap New mail. For
more information about email, see “Email” on
The device automatically merges entries that it finds to
have similar data. If you need to manually merge
entries or break the link between entries, follow the
procedures below.
4. Updates and events shows the contact’s Facebook
status, updates, and events, and shows when he or
she uploads new photos to Flickr. When there is a
notification of the contact’s birthday, you can tap
the notification to call the contact directly or send a
message greeting.
Manually Merging Entries in People
1. Press
and tap
> People.
2. On the All tab, tap the entry (not the icon or photo)
you want to merge with another entry on your
device.
5. Gallery shows the contact’s Facebook and Flickr
photo albums. For more information, see “Viewing
3. On the upper right corner of the screen, tap
or
(if there are suggested links.)
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. On the screen, you can:
Editing an Entry in People
Ⅲ If there are suggested links, tap
to link the
entry to the selected account.
Displaying an Entry in People
Ⅲ Tap one of the options available in the Add
contact section.
ᮣ
Press
entry.
and tap
> People, and then tap an
5. Tap Done.
Adding a Number to an Entry in People
Unlinking Entries
1. Press
and tap
> People.
2. On the All tab, tap the entry (not the icon or photo)
whose contact information link you want to break.
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.
3. Scroll down the screen and tap Add > Phone.
3. On the upper right corner of the screen, tap
.
4. Tap the type of phone number you want to add.
(For example, Home or Work.)
4. On the Linked contacts section, tap
the entry to break the link.
beside
5. Enter the phone number and tap Save. (Scroll
down the screen to see the Save button.)
5. Tap Done.
Editing an Entry in People
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Under the Phone section, tap the number you want
Assigning a Picture to an Entry
Assign a picture to display when a specified contact
calls you.
to edit.
4. Edit the number using the keypad.
Tip: Tap the Number type (for example, [
], to change
Entry in People” for details.)
the type of number).
Tap X at the right side of a number to delete it.
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.
5. Tap Save. (Scroll down the screen to see the Save
3. Tap
at the top-left corner of the screen.
button.)
4. Tap Gallery or Camera.
Ⅲ If you selected Gallery, select an album to find the
picture, tap the picture you want to use, crop the
picture, and tap Save.
Selecting a Ringer Type for an Entry
Assign a ringer type to an entry in People so you can
identify the caller by the ringer type. See “Sound
Ⅲ If you selected Camera, the camera will launch
and you will use it to take a new picture.
2. Scroll down the screen, and then tap Ringtone.
5. Tap Save. (Scroll down the screen to see the Save
button.)
3. Select a ring tone (the ring tone plays back) from
the menu and tap OK.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding an Email Address to an Entry
Sending an Entry as a vCard
1. Press
and tap
> People.
Entry in People” for details.)
2. On the All tab, press and hold the name of the
contact (not the icon or photo) whose contact
information you want to send, and then tap Send
contact as vCard.
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.
3. Under the Email section, tap the box after
.
4. Enter the email address and tap Save. (Scroll down
the screen to see the Save button.)
3. Select the type of information you want to send,
and then tap Send.
Adding Additional Information to an Entry
You can add additional information to an entry in
People.
4. Enter the recipient’s number or email address, and
then tap Send.
You can also send the vCard using Bluetooth. To learn
how to send files through Bluetooth, see “Using
Entry in People” for details.)
Deleting an Entry
2. Scroll down the screen and tap Edit.
3. Scroll down the screen and tap Add.
1. Press
2. Tap a contact you wish to delete.
3. Press and then tap Delete.
and tap
> People.
4. Tap the type of information you want to add such
as Phone, Email, or Postal address.
4. Tap OK to confirm the deletion.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding Group Entries
Deleting Multiple Entries
1. Press
and tap
> People.
1. Press
and tap
> People.
2. Scroll to the Groups tab.
2. On the All tab, press
, and then tap Delete.
3. Scroll through the group titles. To display entries
belonging to a group, tap the group name.
3. Select the entries you want to delete, and then tap
Delete.
4. To display an entry within the group, tap the entry.
4. Tap OK to confirm the deletions.
Finding Entries in People
Finding Contacts by Name
5. To dial the entry’s default phone number (Primary),
tap the number under Action.
details.
1. Press
and tap
> People.
2. Scroll through all the entries.
– or –
Press
and enter the first letter or letters of a
name (such as “dav” for “Dave”). (The more letters
you enter, the more your search narrows.)
3. To display an entry, tap an entry.
4. To dial the entry’s default phone number (Primary),
tap the number under Action.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Importing Entries From the Storage Card
Backing Up and Importing Entries in
People
You can import only those contacts that were exported
to the storage card using the Export to SD card feature
on the device. See “Backing Up People Entries to the
Backing Up People Entries to the Storage
Card
1. Press
2. Press
SD card.
and tap
> People.
1. Press
and tap
> People.
, and then tap Import/Export > Import from
2. Press
SD card.
, and then tap Import/Export > Export to
3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync
accounts set up on your device, tap the type for
the imported contacts.
3. When asked to confirm, tap OK.
Tip: Press
to stop the import process.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press and hold a group and tap Edit group.
Working with Groups
3. To add entries to the group, tap Add contact to
group, tap the entries you want to add, and tap
Done.
On the Groups tab, you can assign contacts to groups
so you can easily send text, multimedia, or email
messages to a whole group. You can also sync your
device’s groups with the groups in your Google
account, accessible using your computer’s Web
browser.
– or –
To remove entries from the group, tap
at the
right side of the entry you want to remove.
4. Tap Save. (Tap
to close the keyboard if you do
not see the Save button.)
Creating a Group and Adding Entries
1. Press
and tap
Add group.
> People > Groups tab >
Sending a Text or Multimedia Message to
All Entries in a Group
2. Enter a name for the group and tap Add contact to
group.
1. Press
and tap
> People > Groups tab.
3. Select the entries you want in the group. You can
2. Tap the group you want to send a message to.
use the search bar to search for entries quickly.
3. Go to the Group action tab, and then tap Send
group message to send a message to the group.
4. Tap Save.
Note: Depending on your account, you may be charged per
group member for each message sent. For example, if
you send a message to a group of five people, you will
be charged for five messages.
Adding or Removing Entries From a
Group
1. Press
and tap
> People > Groups tab.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For instructions on composing and sending your
153.
Deleting a Group
1. Press
and tap
> People > Groups tab.
2. Press and hold a group and tap Delete group.
Sending an Email Message to All
Entries in a Group
Using the People Widget
1. Press
and tap
> People > Groups tab.
Put the group of people you contact most right on the
screen of your device by adding them with the People
widget. Using the People widget, you can instantly
place a call, send a message, or view details of a
favorite contact with a single tap.
2. Tap the group you want to send an email message
to.
3. Go to the Group action tab, and then tap Send
group mail to send an email message to the group.
4. Tap Compose to use Gmail to send the email
message. (You need to be signed in to your
Google account to use Gmail.)
Adding the People Widget
1. Press
and tap
> Widget > People.
– or –
2. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.
3. Select the group you want to add as a widget.
Tap Mail to use your Exchange ActiveSync or
POP3/IMAP email account to send the email
message. (You need to have an email account set
up on your device.)
4. Drag the widget to a blank screen, and then
release.
Tip: The People widget requires a whole screen.
For instructions on composing and sending your
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Default Communication
Method
Getting In Touch With a Contact
1. Press
, and then go to the People widget.
1. Press
, and then go to the People widget.
2. Do either of the following:
Ⅲ Tap a contact’s icon or photo on the widget. The
default communication method will be performed.
If you have not set a default communication
method, the Select default action screen will
open. (See “Setting the Default Communication
Method” on this page for details.)
2. Tap a contact on the widget.
3. On the Select default action screen, tap the
communication method you want for the contact.
Changing the Default Communication
Method
Ⅲ Tap the name of the contact to open the contact
details screen. On the contact details screen,
choose how you want to communicate with the
contact by tapping an option under Action.
1. Press
, and then go to the People widget.
2. Tap the name of a contact on the widget to open
the person’s contact card.
3. Press
, and then tap More > Set Widget Action.
4. On the Select default action screen, tap the
communication method you want for the contact.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After signing in to Facebook for HTC Sense, you can:
Connecting with Your Social
Networks
ⅷ Download your Facebook contacts and their contact
details to People on your device. Your Facebook
contacts’ status updates display on your contacts list.
Facebook for HTC Sense
ⅷ Browse through Facebook photo albums in Gallery.
page 130 for details.)
View your Facebook updates in supported applications
on the device. See “Logging in to and Synchronizing
how to sign in to Facebook for HTC Sense.
ⅷ Read Facebook status updates in Friend Stream.
Updating Your Facebook Status
1. Press
and tap
> People > All tab.
2. Tap Me or [Your Name] > Facebook.
3. Enter your status in the “What’s on your mind” text
box and tap Share.
Synchronizing Facebook for HTC Sense
Facebook for
HTC Sense - Photos
Facebook for
HTC Sense - People
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Facebook for HTC Sense Update
Settings
3. Press
to go to the Facebook home screen and
access other functions.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Accounts & sync.
Note: While on the Facebook home screen, press
and
then tap Settings to set refresh and notification options.
2. Tap Facebook for HTC Sense.
On some Facebook screens, you can press and hold
an item to open an options menu.
3. Tap Account settings > Update schedule, and then
select the time interval.
With the Facebook application, you can:
Facebook for Android
Ⅲ Share your thoughts and check other people’s
The Facebook application on your phone lets you keep
up and stay close with your friends in Facebook.
It offers most of the features that you are familiar with
when using Facebook on your computer.
status updates.
Ⅲ View your friends list and write on someone’s
wall.
Ⅲ Comment on and like a friend’s post.
If you have more than one Facebook account, you can
sign in to the Facebook application using your other
Facebook account.
Ⅲ View someone’s personal information, including
photo albums.
Ⅲ Check your Facebook notifications.
Opening Facebook
Ⅲ Take a photo and upload it directly to your
Facebook account.
1. Press
and tap
> Facebook.
2. If this is your first time using Facebook, follow the
onscreen instructions to sign into your Facebook
account. Your Facebook profile is then displayed
on the screen.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding the Facebook Widget
Facebook FAQ
Add the Facebook widget to the Home screen to let
you quickly share your thoughts and view your friends’
status updates.
What are the differences between the Facebook for HTC
Sense and the Facebook for Android application?
ⅷ Facebook for HTC Sense is not a standalone
application. It is integrated into People, Friend
Stream, and Gallery to give you up-to-date
information about your Facebook contacts (their
status updates and new photos) in these
applications.
1. Press
and tap
> Widget > Facebook.
2. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.
3. Drag the widget to a blank space on the Home
screen, and then release.
ⅷ The Facebook for Android application is a
standalone application. Use this application to do
most of the things that you would do when you’re
using your computer’s Web browser to access your
Facebook account, such as adding a friend and
adding captions to photos you upload.
ⅷ The two do not share the same login credentials.
Signing in to Facebook for HTC Sense does not sign
you in to the Facebook application and vice versa. If
you want to use the same Facebook account for
both, you’ll have to sign in to both using the same
login credentials.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Friend Stream Screen
Using Friend Stream
Only updates from accounts that you are signed in to
will be shown. You can filter the updates that show in
Friend Stream by pressing
Streamline your social network accounts through
Friend Stream. Update your status simultaneously, view
status updates, and look through photo updates from
your Facebook, Twitter, and other social network
accounts using Friend Stream.
and then tapping
Settings > Show updates.
1
2
Opening Friend Stream
1. Press
and tap
> Friend Stream.
2. If you are not signed in to a social network
account, you will be asked to sign in to at least one
of the social network accounts.
6
5
4
3. Friend Stream opens in the All updates tab. Slide
your finger on the bottom row to go to the tab you
want.
3
1. Tap to enter and send a status update.
2. Depending on the type, tap to open Peep, post a
Facebook comment, look at the Flickr album, or
open the link in the Web browser.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Shows all the messages from the social network
accounts that you are signed in to.
Adding the Friend Stream Widget
Add the Friend Stream widget so you can update your
status simultaneously and view status updates from
your social network accounts right on your device’s
screen.
4. Shows only links posted on Facebook.
5. Shows only photo updates from Facebook and
Flickr.
6. Shows only status updates from Facebook and
Twitter.
1. Press
and tap
> Widget > Friend Stream.
2. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.
3. Drag the widget to a blank space on a screen, and
then release.
Updating Your Status
1. Press
and tap
> Friend Stream.
2. On the All Updates tab, tap the “What’s on your
mind?” text field.
3. Tap , and then in the Update dialog box, select
to which accounts you want the status update to
be posted. Tap Done.
Note: Only the accounts that you are signed in to will be
shown on the dialog box.
4. Enter your status update, and then tap Share.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calendar
2E. Calendar & Tools
Use Calendar to create and manage events, meetings,
and appointments. Your Calendar helps organize your
time and reminds you of important events. Depending
on your synchronization settings, your device’s
Calendar stays in sync with your Calendar on the Web,
Exchange ActiveSync calendar, and Outlook calendar.
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Adding an Event to the Calendar
1. Press
and tap
> Calendar.
2. On any Calendar view, press
and tap New
event to open the Event details screen.
Note: If you are in Agenda or Month view, you can also tap
at the bottom-right of the screen.
If you are in Day view, tap Add event.
3. If you have more than one calendar, select a
calendar in which to add the event:
Ⅲ Select My Calendar to create an event that will
appear only on your device.
Ⅲ Select your Google Account to create a Google
Calendar event. If you have several Google
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calendars on the Web, select one in which to add
your event.
Ⅲ If the event is a special occasion such as a
birthday or an all-day event, set the From and To
dates, and then select the All Day check box.
Note: You can create multiple Google Calendars only in
Google Calendar on the Web. After creating them in
Google Calendar on the Web, you’ll be able to see
them in the Calendar application on your device. For
more information about creating and managing
multiple Google Calendars, visit the Google website:
http://calendar.google.com.
6. Enter the event location and description.
7. Set the event reminder time.
Note: You can add another reminder time in a Google
Calendar event. Press
and then tap Add reminder
to add another reminder.
If you have synchronized your device with an
Exchange ActiveSync account or Outlook on your
computer, you can also select these calendars.
8. If the event occurs on a regular basis, tap the
Repetition box and then choose how often the
event occurs.
Ⅲ Select PC Sync to create an Outlook Calendar
event to sync with your computer.
9. Scroll to the bottom of the screen and then tap
Save.
Ⅲ Select Exchange to create an Exchange
ActiveSync calendar event.
4. Enter a name for the event.
5. To specify the date and time of the event, do one of
the following:
Ⅲ If there is a time frame for the event, tap the From
and To dates and times to set them.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inviting Guests to Your Event (Google
Account Only)
Sending a Meeting Request (Exchange
ActiveSync only)
If you want to invite guests to your event, you need to
create and add the event in your Google Calendar.
An email invitation will be sent to your guests using
your Google Account.
If you have an Exchange ActiveSync account set up on
your device, you can use Calendar to create a meeting
appointment and send a meeting request email to the
people you want to invite to your meeting.
1. Open Calendar and create a new event. Tap the
Calendar field and then select your Google
Account (or one of your other Google Calendars).
For the steps, see “Adding an Event to the
Calendar.”
1. Open Calendar and create a new event. Tap the
Calendar field and then select Exchange. For the
steps, see “Adding an Event to the Calendar” on
2. Add details about the meeting, such as date and
time, location, and more.
2. Add details about the event, such as date and
time, location, and more.
3. Press
4. Tap
and then tap Meeting Invitation.
3. In the Guests field, enter the email addresses of
everyone you want to invite to the event. Separate
multiple addresses with commas.
and choose attendees from your contacts
or Company Directory.
5. Enter the email subject and your message, and
then tap Send.
4. Tap Save to add the event to your Google
Calendar.
6. Tap Save to add the meeting appointment to your
Exchange ActiveSync Calendar.
If the people to whom you send invitations use Google
Calendar, they’ll receive an invitation in Calendar and
by email.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
83
3. Do one of the following:
Event Alerts
Ⅲ Tap Snooze all to snooze all event reminders for
five minutes.
When your device is turned on and you have an event
alarm scheduled, your device alerts you and displays
the event summary. There are several ways your device
alerts you to scheduled events:
– or –
Ⅲ Tap Dismiss all to dismiss all event reminders.
ⅷ By playing the assigned ringer type.
– or –
ⅷ By showing the
icon on the status bar.
Ⅲ Press
to keep the reminders pending in the
notifications area of the status bar.
ⅷ By showing the Alert screen.
To set reminder settings:
Event Reminders
ᮣ
On any Calendar view, press
and tap More >
If you have set at least one reminder for an event, the
upcoming event icon ( ) will appear in the
notifications area of the status bar to remind you of the
upcoming event.
Settings > Reminder settings.
Viewing Events
You can display the Calendar in daily, weekly, monthly,
To view, dismiss, or snooze the reminder:
or agenda view. To change the Calendar view,
1. Press the status bar, and then drag down the
screen to open the Notifications panel.
press
and tap Day, Agenda, Week, or Month.
Day and Agenda Views
2. Tap the upcoming event name to display the event.
Day view displays a list of the events of one day and
also shows weather information at the bottom of the
screen when you’re viewing events of the current day.
Note: If you have other pending event reminders, these
events will also appear on the screen.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Agenda view shows a list of all your events in
chronological order.
When in Day view, slide left or right across the screen
to view earlier or later days.
Note: In Day view, the weather information appears only if the
event is within the five-day forecast of the Weather
application.
Weather information does not appear in Day view
when you change Day view to display as a time list. To
check, in any calendar view, press
, and tap More >
Settings > Calendar view setting > Day views.
Day view
Agenda view
The color bars on the left side of the events indicate the
type of calendar that includes the event. To find out
what each color represents, press
and then tap
More > Calendars.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Week View
Month View
Week view displays a chart of
the events of one week.
In Month view, you’ll see
markers on days that have
events.
When in Week view:
When in Month view:
ⅷ You can press and hold on a
time slot to create a new
event at that time.
ⅷ Tap
the screen to switch to
Agenda view. Tap on the
on the bottom left of
ⅷ Tap an event to view its
details.
bottom right to create a new
event.
ⅷ Slide left or right across the
screen to view earlier or later
weeks.
ⅷ Tap a day to view the events
of that day.
ⅷ Press and hold a day to
open an options menu from
which you can also choose to create an event or
switch to either Day or Agenda view.
ⅷ Slide up or down the screen to view earlier or later
months.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Events
Choosing Google Calendars to
Synchronize with Your Device
1. Press
and tap
> Calendar.
2. Open the calendar event details:
You can choose which Google Calendars to keep
synchronized on your phone or which ones to stop
synchronizing.
Ⅲ In Agenda, Day, and Week views, tap the calendar
event you want to delete.
Ⅲ In Month view, tap the date where the calendar
event occurs, and tap the calendar event.
Stop Synchronizing a Google Calendar
1. In any Calendar view, press
Calendars.
and tap More >
3. Press
and tap Delete event.
4. In the Delete event confirmation box, tap OK.
2. Press
and tap Remove calendars.
– or –
3. Select a Google Calendar to remove from your
calendars list, and then tap OK.
If the calendar event is recurring, select Only this
event or All events, and tap OK.
4. Press
to update Calendar with the new
changes and return to the Calendar view you were
viewing.
Showing or Hiding Calendars
In any Calendar view, press
and then select or clear a calendar to show or hide it.
Tap All calendars to display all calendars.
, tap More > Calendars,
The calendars that you remove from your calendars list
will no longer be synchronized on your device, but you
remain subscribed to them and can work with them in
Google Calendar on the Web.
The calendars are kept synchronized on your device,
whether or not you hide them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
87
ᮣ
To check if Exchange ActiveSync items are set to
be synchronized, go to the Home screen, press
, and tap Settings > Accounts & sync > Exchange
ActiveSync.
Adding a Google Calendar to Synchronize
Only the calendars that you’ve created or subscribed to
on the Web, but previously removed from your
calendars list, are shown in the list of calendars that
you can add.
Synchronizing an Outlook Calendar
1. In any Calendar view, press
Calendars.
and tap More >
2. Press
and tap Add calendars.
Sending a vCalendar
3. Select a Google Calendar to add to your calendars
list, and then tap OK.
You can send a calendar event as a vCalendar to
someone’s phone or your computer using Bluetooth.
You can also send it as a file attachment with your
message.
4. Press
to update Calendar with the changes
and return to the Calendar view you were using
before.
1. Press
and tap
> Calendar.
2. Press and hold the calendar event you want to
send, and then tap Share vCalendar. In Month view,
you need to tap the day when the event takes
place before you can press and hold the event.
Synchronizing an Exchange ActiveSync
Calendar
If you have set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
account on your device, you can also synchronize
Exchange ActiveSync calendar events on your device.
Calendar events on your Exchange ActiveSync will also
show in Calendar if you chose to synchronize with the
Exchange ActiveSync Server.
3. Choose how to send the vCalendar (Bluetooth,
Mail, or Message).
Ⅲ For Bluetooth, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth
on your device and connect to the receiving
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bluetooth device so the vCalendar can be sent.
For more information, see “Using Bluetooth” on
Calculator
Your device comes with a built-in calculator.
Ⅲ For Email, a new message window opens and
automatically includes the vCalendar as an
attachment. Your default email account that’s
selected in the Mail application will be used. For
more information, see “Composing and Sending
1. Press
and tap
> Calculator.
2. Enter numbers or formulas using the onscreen
keys.
Note: To switch to a scientific calculator, turn your device
sideways to your left. The scientific calculator lets you
perform more complex calculations with square root,
logarithmic, and trigonometric functions.
Ⅲ For Message, a new multimedia message window
opens and automatically includes the vCalendar
as an attachment. Enter your message recipients,
compose your message, and then tap Send. For
more information, see “Sending a Multimedia
Tap
to remove one digit at a time. Press and hold
to delete the entire number.
3. Tap for the result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
89
Clock
The Clock application is more than just a regular date
and time clock. It functions as a desk clock that shows
the date, time, and weather information, and it can turn
into a night clock or screensaver. It has a world clock
that shows you the current time in several locations
across the globe. There’s also an alarm clock,
stopwatch, and countdown timer.
1
2
3
4
5
Clock.”
Clock.”
To open the Clock application:
4. Stopwatch lets you use the clock as a stopwatch.
5. Timer lets you use the clock as a timer.
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Clock.
Tap the tabs at the bottom row or drag across the tabs
to switch between the different functions of the Clock
application.
Desk Clock
Opening the Clock application brings you directly to
the Desk Clock screen.
The Desk Clock displays the current date, time, and
weather, an alarm clock indicator, and a battery
charging indicator. You can dim the screen to show
only the time and date on the Desk Clock.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Alarm clock indicator shows whether the alarm
clock is on or off. To find out how to turn on and
4. Screensaver button dims the screen and puts it in
screensaver mode. When in screensaver mode,
the time and date will change position on the
screen after every few minutes. To light up the
screen again, tap anywhere on the screen or
3
1
2
press
.
5. Battery charging indicator shows the battery charge
level. You’ll see it only when your device is
plugged in with the power adapter or connected to
your computer.
4
5
You can change the Desk Clock screen to display the
date and time of another time zone. For more
.
1. Weather information of your current location. Tap the
weather information to open the Weather
application where you can see weather forecasts
of the next few days. (For more information, see
2. Dim button dims the screen and displays only the
time and date on the Desk Clock. To light up the
screen again, tap anywhere on the screen or
press
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
2. Enter your home city name. A list of matching cities
and countries based on the letters you entered
appear on the screen.
World Clock
Use the Clock application’s World Clock screen to
check the current time in several places around the
globe simultaneously. You can also set your home city,
add more cities to the world clock list, and manually set
your time zone, date, and time.
3. Tap your city when it appears on the list. Your
home city will appear at the top of the list of cities.
To delete a city on the World Clock list:
To view the time in different locations:
1. Press
and tap
and then press
> Clock > World Clock tab,
> Delete.
ᮣ
Press
To add cities to the World Clock list:
1. Press and tap > Clock > World Clock tab
> Add city.
and tap
> Clock > World Clock tab.
2. Tap the cities you want to remove and tap Delete.
To manually set the time zone, date, and time:
To set the time zone, date, and time on your device
manually, you need to turn off auto time
synchronization first.
2. Enter the city name you want to add. A list of
matching cities and countries based on the letters
you entered appear on the screen.
1. Press
the Home screen.
and then tap the HTC Clock widget on
3. Tap the city.
2. Tap the World Clock tab.
3. Press and then tap Local time settings to open
the Date & time settings screen.
4. Clear the Automatic check box.
To designate your home city:
1. Press
and tap
> Clock > World Clock tab,
> Home settings.
and then press
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Tap Select time zone. Scroll through the list and
Alarm Clock
then tap the time zone that you want.
Your device comes with a built-in alarm clock that has
multiple alarm capabilities.
6. To change the date, tap Set date. Adjust the date
by sliding your finger up or down on the day,
month, and year, and then tap Done.
7. To change the time, tap Set time. Adjust the time by
sliding your finger up or down on the hour and
minute, and then tap Done.
8. Tap the Use 24-hour format check box to switch
between using a 12-hour or a 24-hour time format.
9. Tap Select date format then select how you want
dates to be displayed. (The selected date format
also applies to the date displayed in the alarm
clock.)
Setting an Alarm
1. Press
and tap
> Clock > Alarms tab.
2. Tap one of the default alarms on the screen.
3. In the Set alarm screen, set the alarm time by
sliding your finger up or down on the numbers
and AM/PM.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Enter the alarm Description, set the Alarm sound
and Repeat, and select the Vibrate check box if you
want the device to also vibrate when the alarm
goes off.
Ⅲ Alarm in silent mode (default) allows the alarm to
sound even when your device’s volume is set to
silent mode. Clear this check box if you want to
silence the alarm when the volume is in silent
mode.
5. Tap Done.
Ⅲ Alarm volume determines the volume level that
you want for the alarm.
Tip: If you need to set more than 3 alarms, you can add more
alarms by tapping Add alarm.
Ⅲ Snooze duration determines how long the clock
will snooze between alarms.
Note: You can temporarily disable an alarm by clearing the
check box ( ) of the alarm on the Alarms tab.
Ⅲ Side button behavior determines what happens to
the alarm when pressing the volume buttons of
your device. You can set the button to snooze,
dismiss the alarm, or disable the button. The side
button works only when the device’s screen is not
locked. While on the lock screen, tap the
Deleting an Alarm
1. On the Alarms tab, press
and tap Delete.
2. Select the alarms you want to delete and then tap
Delete.
onscreen Snooze button to snooze, or drag down
the screen to dismiss the alarm.
Changing Alarm Sound Settings
If you’ve set one or more alarms, you can change their
settings such as the alarm volume, how long to snooze
the alarm, and more.
1. Press
2. Press
following:
and tap
> Clock > Alarms tab.
and tap Settings to change any of the
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flashlight
Sharing Games and Applications
Never be caught in the dark again. Use the Flashlight
application to turn on your device’s LED flashlight to
shine a light wherever you need it.
Having fun with a game or application that you’ve
downloaded from Android Market? Share it instantly
with your circle of friends.
Note: For your friends to link to the app and download it from
the Android Market, they must be using an Android
device.
1. Press
>
> All apps and then tap Share.
You’ll the see the list of games and apps that you
downloaded and installed from Android Market.
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Flashlight.
Ⅲ To adjust the brightness, simply tap the onscreen
power button on the flashlight handle.
Ⅲ To close the flashlight, press
.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tap an app, and then choose how to share it:
can simply tap the link to go directly to the game
or app in Android Market to download it.
Bluetooth
Send the link using Bluetooth. See
Facebook
Post the link to Facebook. See “Facebook
Friend
Stream
Post the link to Facebook and Twitter. See
Gmail
Mail
Send the link using your Gmail account.
Send the link using your POP3/IMAP or
Exchange ActiveSync email account. See
Message
Peep
Send the link in a text message. See
Tip: While entering your status update in Friend Stream, you
Share the link on Twitter. See “Peep” on
can also tap
to choose from games or apps that you
want to share in your social networks.
If you’ve already created a new text or email message,
When your friends see the link in your sent
message, email message, or status update, they
press
, and then tap Attach > App
recommendation to choose from your list of installed
games and apps.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Check the places you’ve been before, and then
choose one to set as your destination. (See
“Footprints” on page 241 for more details.)
Car Panel
With the Car Panel, you can easily access footprints,
locate places in Google Maps, and navigate to a
destination that you want. You can also make calls and
search the Web.
2. Search the Web with Google search by simply
dictating words into your device’s microphone.
3. Search the Web with Google search by entering a
word or phrase.
To open Car Panel, press
, and then tap
>
Car Panel.
4. Quickly dial Favorites, dial someone from your call
history list, or use the Dialer. (See “Making and
Answering Calls” on page 22 for more details.)
6
5
1
2
5. View a map of your location using Google Maps.
details.)
6. Get help navigating to your destination using
Google Maps Navigation. (See “Getting Directions”
on page 237 for more details.)
4
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
Making a Call in Car Panel
Exiting Car Panel
From the Car Panel, tap Make a call and then tap one of
Exit Car Panel by doing one of the following:
these icons:
ᮣ
Press
and then tap Exit.
– or –
Press and hold the status bar and then drag it
down to open the Notifications panel. Tap Car
mode enabled.
1
2
3
1. Access your favorites and tap one to place your
call.
2. See a list of your recent calls and tap one to place
your call.
3. Use the Dialer to dial a number or contact name
directly.
Note: Pressing
or
will not close the Car Panel.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Drag on the screen to scroll horizontally or to flip
through the pages of the file.
Quickoffice
Use Quickoffice to view Microsoft® Office Word,
Microsoft® Office Excel®, and Microsoft® Office
PowerPoint® files on your device. Quickoffice supports
viewing Microsoft Office Word (.doc and .docx), Excel
(.xls and .xlsx), PowerPoint (.ppt, .pps, and .pptx), and
text (.txt) files.
Viewing Documents, Presentations, and
Spreadsheets
Make sure you have copied the files to the device’s
microSD card before you open Quickoffice.
1. Press
and tap
> Quickoffice. (You may
need to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
4. While viewing a file:
2. Tap the file you want to open.
Ⅲ Spread or pinch the screen to zoom in or out or
use the zoom controls on the screen to zoom in
or out.
Tip: In the Open file screen, press
and tap Sort to sort the
list by name or date.
Ⅲ For Excel files, press
and then tap Worksheet
to view other worksheets in the file.
Ⅲ For Word and PowerPoint files, tap a URL link to
open the Web page in the browser.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ When you open Word documents, Quickoffice
reflows the text to make it fit the width of the
screen. Double-tap the screen to switch to
continuous view so you can view the page layout.
Adobe Reader
Use Adobe Reader to view PDF files that you have
copied or downloaded to the device’s microSD card.
Note: Quickoffice does not reflow text in tables.
Viewing a PDF File
Ⅲ When you view PowerPoint files, after your zoom
in on a slide, you can double-tap the screen to
zoom out automatically and fit the slide to the
width of the screen.
1. Press
and tap
> Adobe Reader.
2. On the Adobe Reader screen, tap the file you want
to view.
– or –
Tap the Recently Viewed tab to see a list of PDF
files that you have previously opened on your
device, and then tap the file that you want to view.
3. While viewing a PDF file:
Ⅲ Spread or pinch the screen to zoom in or out.
Ⅲ Drag to scroll through the pages.
Ⅲ Press
and then tap Reflow View to temporarily
enlarge and fit the text to the width of the screen
for easier reading. To change back to the original
view, press
again and then tap Page View.
Tip: To open another PDF file, press
and then tap Open.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Back up and sync information from your device to
your computer before you do a factory reset or a
software (ROM) upgrade of your device.
HTC Sync
With HTC Sync™ you can:
Note: Make sure the included microSD card is installed on
ⅷ Synchronize contacts between Microsoft Outlook,
Outlook Express, or Windows Address Book contacts
on your computer and your device.
your device before using HTC Sync.
Here’s what you need to do to install, set up, and use
HTC Sync on your computer:
ⅷ Sync your calendar events between the Outlook or
Windows Calendar on your computer and your
device.
1. Use the HTC Sync installer that’s on the supplied
microSD card to install. For the steps on how to
install, see “Installing HTC Sync From the microSD
Card” on this page. You can also download and
install HTC Sync from the HTC support website.
ⅷ Bring your photos, videos, documents, songs, and
playlists from your computer to your device so you
can enjoy them on the go.
ⅷ Easily import your captured photos and videos from
your device to your computer.
2. Connect your device to your computer using the
supplied USB cable and set up HTC Sync to
recognize your device. Follow the steps in “Setting
ⅷ Sync bookmarks in the HTC Bookmarks favorites
folder on your computer and all bookmarks stored
on your phone’s web browser.
ⅷ Install third-party mobile phone apps (not
downloaded from Android Market) from your
computer.
3. Choose the information to sync between your
computer and your device and how you want to
sync your selections.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
To easily set up synchronization using HTC Sync’s
guided wizard, follow the steps in “Setting Up
Make sure that the microSD card is inserted on your
device. Copy the HTC Sync installer from the microSD
card to your computer and use it to install.
Important: HTC Sync requires USB 2.0 on your computer to
connect and sync with your device. To see a
complete list of the computer and software
requirements, check the HTC Sync software
download page on the HTC support website:
4. Sync your computer with your device automatically
or manually. See “Setting Up HTC Sync to
Recognize Your Device” for details.
Installing HTC Sync From the microSD
Card
The HTC Sync version on the microSD card that came
with your device can be installed on Microsoft
Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7.
For trouble-free installation, before you begin
installing HTC Sync, quit all running programs
and temporarily disable your anti-virus program.
1. Connect your device to your computer using the
USB cable that came with your device.
2. On your device’s Connect to PC screen, tap Disk
drive, and then tap Done.
3. After you’ve selected disk drive mode on your
device, your computer will treat your device as a
removable disk (just like any USB drive). Open this
removable disk so you can see what’s on the
microSD card.
4. Copy HTCSync.exe to your computer.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After copying, unmount the removable disk (that is,
the connected device) as required by your
computer’s operating system to safely remove your
device.
2. On the Connect to PC screen in your device, tap
HTC Sync and then tap Done.
3. Your device will attempt to find HTC Sync on your
computer. Wait for a few seconds for the process
to finish.
6. On your computer, double-click HTCSync.exe and
follow the onscreen instructions to install HTC
Sync.
Note: If your device displays a message indicating that it’s
unable to find HTC Sync, try disconnecting and
reconnecting the USB cable, and then repeat step 2.
After installing HTC Sync, the HTC Sync icon is added
to your computer’s system tray (check the bottom-right
side of your computer screen). You can double-click
this icon to open HTC Sync.
4. When your device finds HTC Sync, your computer
will display the Phone Connection Wizard. Click
Next.
5. Enter the name you want for your device, and then
click Finish.
Setting Up HTC Sync to Recognize Your
Device
After installing, set up HTC Sync to recognize your
device.
6. Check the HTC Sync icon at the bottom-right side
of your computer screen. If it is green, that means
your device has successfully connected with your
computer and HTC Sync recognizes your device
1. Connect your device to the computer with the
supplied USB cable. Or, if your device is already
connected, press and hold the status bar and drag
your finger down to open the Notifications panel.
Then tap the status that shows Select to change
USB connection type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
103
4. Select Sync music files from iTunes and Windows
Media Player if you’re using any of these apps on
your computer. Then, choose one of the following:
Setting up Synchronization for Music
Bring the music tracks and songs you play on your
computer to your device. If you have playlists created in
Apple® iTunes® or Microsoft® Windows Media® Player,
you can sync these too and enjoy them on the go.
All songs
and playlists
Choose to sync all songs and playlists
from iTunes and Windows Media Player.
Choose to select only your favorite
playlist titles.
Selected
playlists
Note: You can sync audio files in these formats: *.aac, *.amr,
*.m4a, *.mid, *.midi, *.mp3, *.wav, and *.wma.
1. On the Device panel, click Music and then click the
On button.
Setting Up Synchronization for the Gallery
You can choose to automatically copy your device’s
camera shots to your computer. At the same time,
when you select a folder from your computer, the
photos and videos stored in it are also synchronized on
your phone’s storage card.
Turning Music sync on means you want this
category included every time you sync your
computer and device.
2. Select Sync music files from, and then click Add.
3. Choose the folder that contains your audio files,
and then click OK.
Note: You can sync photos and videos in these formats:
●
Photos: *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpeg, *.jpg, and *.png.
Videos: *.3gp, *.3g2, *.mp4, and *.wmv.
●
All supported audio files added to this folder will
also be copied to your device’s storage card
during synchronization.
1. On the Device panel, click Gallery, and then click
the On button.
Turning Gallery sync on means you want this
category included every time you sync your
computer and device.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. To automatically import your camera shots to your
computer during synchronization, select Copy
device Camera Shots to PC.
Setting Up Synchronization for Calendar
Events
Photos and videos from your storage card will be
saved to the \My Photos\Device Camera Shots
folder on your computer.
Your device can sync appointments and events with
your calendar in Microsoft Outlook or Windows
Calendar.
3. Select Sync PC photos & videos from, and then click
Add.
1. On the Device panel, click Calendar, and then click
the On button.
Turning Calendar sync on means you want this
category included every time you sync your
computer and device.
4. Choose the folder on your computer that contains
your multimedia files, and then click OK.
All supported image and video files added to this
folder will also be copied to your device’s storage
card during synchronization.
2. Select the app you want to sync calendar events
with.
3. Choose the number of days of calendar events to
sync. You can choose One week ago, Two weeks
ago, or One month ago.
4. In cases where conflicting information is found on
both the device and computer, choose which
information you want to keep.
Note: You can sync the following calendar event details:
Event name, Event date, Start time, End time, Event
location, Description, Reminder, and Repetition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
105
Setting up Synchronization for People
Sync your phone contacts with your Outlook, Outlook
Express, or Windows Contacts.
Setting Up Synchronization for Calendar
Events
Your device can sync appointments and events with
your calendar in Microsoft Outlook or Windows
Calendar.
1. On the Device panel, click Gallery, and then click
the On button.
Turning Gallery sync on means you want this
category included every time you sync your
computer and device.
1. On the Device panel, click People, and then click
the On button.
Turning People sync on means you want this
category included every time you sync your
computer and device.
2. To automatically import your camera shots to your
computer during synchronization, select Copy
device Camera Shots to PC.
2. Select the app you want to sync your contacts with.
Photos and videos from your storage card will be
saved to the \My Photos\Device Camera Shots
folder on your computer.
3. In cases where conflicting information is found on
both the device and computer, choose which
information you want to keep.
3. Select Sync PC photos & videos from, and then click
Add.
Note: Only the contact fields supported on your device will be
synchronized.
4. Choose the folder on your computer that contains
your multimedia files, and then click OK.
All supported image and video files added to this
folder will also be copied to your device’s storage
card during synchronization.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up Synchronization for Bookmarks Setting up Synchronization for Documents
Sync the bookmarks inside the “HTC Bookmarks”
favorites folder in your computer’s Web browser with
the bookmarks stored in your device’s Web browser.
You can sync files and documents from your computer
to your device. Make sure that your device has the app
needed to open or view such files or documents.
Note: Your device can open and view files with these
extensions: .doc, .docx, .xls, .xlsx, .pps, .ppt, .pptx, .txt,
and .pdf. You may have installed other apps capable of
working with additional file types.
1. On the Device panel, click Bookmarks, and then
click the On button.
Turning Bookmarks sync on means you want this
category included every time you sync your
computer and device.
You can also sync email attachments that you stored
on your device’s storage card to your computer.
2. Select the Web browser that stores the bookmarks
you want to sync to your device.
To sync email attachments stored on your phone’s
storage card to your computer, you must set up an
Exchange ActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email account on
your device using Mail. For more information on how to
do this, see “Synchronizing Exchange ActiveSync” on
Note: Only the Web page title and URL information are
synchronized.
●
If you are using Firefox and have selected to sync it
with your device, make sure to close all Firefox
browser windows before you begin
synchronization.
1. On the Device panel, click Documents, and then
click the On button.
●
When conflicting information is found on both the
device and computer, HTC Sync keeps the
information from your computer.
Turning Documents sync on means you want this
category included every time you sync your
computer and device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
107
2. To sync email attachments that you’ve stored on
your device’s storage card, select Copy all
download Mail documents to PC.
connect your device to your computer, synchronization
automatically begins based on your sync options.
Important: Always check the estimated file size of new items
that you want to synchronize with your device. You
will see a warning icon beside the estimated
storage usage bar when there isn’t enough space
left on your storage card.
When you sync the phone with your computer,
email attachments will be saved to the
\My Documents\Device documents folder on your
computer.
3. To sync files and documents from your computer
to your device’s storage card, select Sync PC
documents from, and then click Add.
Downloading the Latest HTC Sync
Upgrade
Visit the HTC support website (www.htc.com/support)
from time to time to check for the most recent HTC
Sync upgrade so you can download and install it on
your computer.
4. Choose a folder that contains the files you want to
sync with your device, and then click OK.
When you sync the device with your computer, the
files and documents from your computer will be
saved to the \My Documents\Documents folder on
your device’s storage card.
After installing the latest upgrade, set up HTC Sync
again to recognize and sync with your device. Follow
Synchronizing Your Device
After you’ve installed and configured HTC Sync, click
the Sync now button.
After synchronization is complete, click Disconnect and
safely remove your device as required by your
computer’s operating system. The next time you
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. In HTC Sync, click Application Installer.
Installing Apps From Your Computer to
Your Device
If you have applications (files with an .apk extension) on
your computer, you can use HTC Sync to install them
to your device. We strongly recommend you install only
applications that you trust.
6. In the Application Installer file types dialog box,
make sure that the Android OS installer file (apk)
check box is selected, and then click OK.
Note: This dialog box only appears the first time you use the
Application Installer.
7. Click Next.
1. On your device, press
>
, tap Settings >
Applications, and then select the Unknown sources
check box to allow applications from your
computer to be installed to your device.
8. Click Browse, locate the application file (*.apk) on
your computer, and then click Open.
9. After selecting the application, click Next.
Note: You only have to do this step once. You do not need to
do this step again next time you install another
10. Click Done. Check your device’s screen to see if
there are additional instructions to complete the
installation.
application from your computer to your device.
2. Connect your device to the computer with the
supplied USB cable. Or, if your device is already
connected, press the status bar and drag down to
open the Notifications panel. Tap the status that
shows Select to change USB connection type.
Updating Your Device
To download software updates to your device:
ᮣ
Press
>
> Settings > System updates >
3. On the Connect to PC screen in your device, tap
HTC Sync and then tap Done.
Firmware update. (Your device automatically
downloads and installs any available updates. You
may be required to power your device off and
back on to complete the software upgrade.)
4. On your computer, double-click the HTC Sync icon
in the system tray ( ) to open HTC Sync.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
109
want to use. To complete your task, simply follow the
voice prompts.
2F. Voice Services
Available ASR commands include:
ⅷ Call <Name or Voicemail> to call an entry in your
People list or voicemail. (See “Making a Voice Call
ࡗ ࡗ ⅷ Dial <Number> to dial a spoken phone number.
ⅷ Redial to dial the last outgoing call.
Automatic Speech Recognition
(ASR)
ⅷ Open <Application Name> to open an application in
your device. (See “Opening Applications With ASR”
Tip: Use ASR in a quiet environment so it can accurately
You can use your device’s built-in automatic speech
recognition (ASR) software to dial a phone number in
People or to launch device functions. All you have to do
is to talk into the device, and ASR will recognize your
voice and complete tasks by itself.
recognize your commands.
Note: Regardless of which command you use, you will be
asked to confirm your choice, or choose from a menu
if ASR is not sure what you would like to do.
Activating ASR
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Voice Dialer. (You may
need to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
The screen displays “Listening...” and the device
prompts you to say the name of the command you
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Wait until you hear a tone and the word
Making a Voice Call With ASR
“Listening...” appears on the screen.
1. Press
and tap
> Voice Dialer.
3. Say “Open [application name]” to open an
application in your device.
2. Wait until you hear a tone and the word
“Listening...” appears on the screen.
4. Tap YES to confirm or CANCEL to cancel the
command; or choose from a menu if ASR is not
sure what you would like to do.
3. Say “Call [contact name]” to call a person stored in
your People list.
– or –
Managing Voice Memos
Say “Dial [contact number]” to dial a spoken
phone number.
Use your device’s Voice Recorder to record brief
memos to remind you of important events, phone
numbers, grocery list items, or to create a ring tone.
Note: When dialing a phone number, numbers can be three
digits (for example, 911), seven digits (for example,
555-1234), or ten digits (for example, 222-555-1234).
4. Tap YES to confirm or CANCEL to cancel the
command; or choose from a menu if ASR is not
sure what you would like to do.
Recording Voice Memos
1. Press
and tap
> Voice Recorder. (You
may need to scroll down the screen to see the
icon.)
Opening Applications With ASR
You can jump directly to many applications by saying
“Open” followed by the application name.
2. Tap
and speak into the device’s
microphone.
To end the recording of your memo:
Tap
1. Press
and tap
> Voice Dialer.
ᮣ
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
3. On the All recordings screen, press and hold the
voice memo you want to set as a ring tone, and
then tap Set as ringtone on the options menu.
Voice Memo Options
To play the voice memos you have recorded:
ᮣ
After recording a voice memo, tap
– or –
.
Renaming Voice Memos
1. Press
and tap
> Voice Recorder.
Tap
To share a voice memo:
1. Press and tap
and then tap the file you want to play.
2. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap
.
3. On the All recordings screen, press and hold the
voice memo you want to rename, and then tap
Rename on the options menu.
> Voice Recorder.
2. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap
.
3. On the All recordings screen, press and hold the
voice memo you want to share, and then tap Share
on the options menu.
4. Enter the new name and tap Save.
Erasing Voice Memos
4. On the Share options menu, select how you want
to share the voice memo.
1. Press
and tap
> Voice Recorder.
2. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap
.
To learn how to send files using Bluetooth, see “Using
3. On the All recordings, press
Delete.
and then tap
To set a voice clip as a ring tone
1. Press
and tap
> Voice Recorder.
2. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap
.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Do any of the following:
Voice Input
Ⅲ To erase one or more voice memos, select the
check boxes at the right side of the voice memo
names, and then tap Delete.
You can dictate words to enter them in most text fields
that let you use the onscreen keyboard.
Ⅲ To erase all voice memos, Press
and then tap Delete.
, tap Select All,
Press and hold the Voice input key ( ). When your
phone cues you to “Speak now”, tell your phone what
you want to type.
Note: First make sure to select the language you’ll be
using in the Voice input & output settings.
Since your phone uses Google’s speech-recognition
service, you need to be connected to the Internet to
enter text by speaking.
Setting the voice input language
1. Press
>
, then tap Settings > Voice input &
output > Voice recognizer settings.
2. Tap Language, then choose the language you
want.
Available languages depend on the voice input
languages supported by Google.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the microSD Card
1. With the device turned off, insert a coin or other flat
object into the slot at the bottom of the battery
compartment cover and lift up gently to remove.
2G. microSD Card
2. Lift the battery out at the notch just below the
ࡗ ࡗ camera lens, and then set it aside.
3. Locate the latch at the bottom center of the battery
compartment, and then lift the latch to unlock the
microSD card slot.
Your Device’s microSD Card
The microSD Card
Your device is equipped with a 2 GB microSDTM
(Secure Digital) memory card that allows you to store
images, videos, music, documents, and voice data on
your device.
Important: Your device comes with the microSD card
preinstalled.
4. Gently pull the microSD card out from the slot, and
then press the latch back to the locked position.
5. Re-install the battery and the back cover. For more
information on how to remove and re-install the
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
back cover and battery, see “Battery and Charger”
2. Lift the battery out at the notch just below the
camera lens, and then set it aside.
Note: You can easily damage the microSD card by improper
operation. Please be careful when inserting, removing,
or handling the microSD card.
Make sure your battery is fully charged before using
the microSD card. Your data may become damaged
or unusable if the battery runs out while using the
microSD card.
3. Locate the latch at the bottom center of the battery
compartment, and then lift the latch to unlock the
microSD card slot.
Inserting the microSD Card
1. Insert a coin or other flat object into the slot at the
bottom of the battery compartment cover and lift
up gently to remove.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
115
4. Carefully insert the microSD card into the slot, and
then press the latch to lock the slot and secure the
card in place.
Viewing the microSD Card Memory
ᮣ
With the microSD card inserted, press
>
and tap Settings > SD & phone storage. (The total
and available memory space will be displayed.)
Formatting the microSD Card
Formatting a microSD card permanently removes all
files stored on the card.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings.
2. Scroll down the screen, tap SD & phone storage >
Unmount SD card > Format SD card >
Format SD card > Erase everything.
5. Re-install the battery and the back cover.
Note: The formatting procedure erases all the data on the
microSD card, after which the files CANNOT be
retrieved. To prevent the loss of important data, please
check the contents before you format the card.
When you unmount the SD card, you need to remove
and then reinsert the microSD card or turn the device
off and then on for the device to recognize the microSD
card again.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unmounting the microSD Card
Using the Device’s microSD Card
as a USB Drive
When you need to remove the microSD card, you must
unmount the microSD card first to prevent corrupting
the data stored on it or damaging the microSD card.
Since you will remove the battery first before you can
remove the microSD card, close all running
To transfer music, pictures, and other files from your
computer to your device’s microSD card, you need
to set the device’s microSD card as a USB drive.
applications on your device and save any data first.
1. Connect the device to your computer using the
supplied USB cable.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings.
2. Scroll down the screen, tap SD & phone storage >
Unmount SD card.
2. When the Connect to PC dialog box appears, tap
Disk drive, and then tap Done.
3. Remove the microSD card by following the
instructions in “Removing the microSD Card” on
3. On your computer, the connected device is
recognized as a removable disk. Navigate to this
removable disk and open it.
4. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Copy files from the computer to the root folder on
the device’s storage card.
Ⅲ Copy files from the device’s storage card to a
folder on your computer or computer desktop.
5. After copying the files, unmount the removable
disk (that is, the connected device) as required by
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
your computer’s operating system to safely remove
your device, and do either of the following:
Ⅲ Disconnect the device from the computer.
Ⅲ If you want to keep the device connected to the
computer but want the device to be able to
access and use the storage card, open the
Notifications panel, tap Disk drive, select an option
other than Disk drive, and then tap Done.
Note: The device will not recognize the microSD card when it
is connected to a computer as a disk drive. You will not
be able to use some of the device’s applications such
as the camera or Music.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: Make sure the microSD card is installed before
you use the camera or camcorder. All pictures or
videos that you capture using your device are
stored on the microSD card. For more information
on how to install a microSD card on your device,
2H. Camera & Multimedia
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Opening the Camera
ᮣ
To open the camera in photo mode and take
photos, press and tap > Camera.
ᮣ
To open the camera directly in video mode so you
can immediately start capturing videos, press
Taking Pictures and Shooting
Videos
and tap
> Camcorder.
You can use the camera or camcorder to take and
share pictures and videos. Your device comes with a
5.0 megapixel camera with an autofocus feature that
lets you capture sharp pictures and videos.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Flash button Tap to switch between various camera
Viewfinder Screen
You’ll find the following controls on the Viewfinder
screen:
flash modes.
4. Zoom button displays or hides the onscreen zoom
5. Shutter release button Tap this button to take a
photo or begin capturing video. Tap it again to
stop capturing video.
1
2
6. View button Opens the Gallery application so you
can browse through and view the photos and
videos on your storage card. For more information,
Review Screen
After capturing a photo or video, the review screen lets
you save, view, send, or delete the picture or video by
tapping a button at the bottom of the screen.
1. Menu tab opens the menu panel and lets you
change the camera settings. For more information,
2. Autofocus indicator Whenever you point the
camera at a different subject or location, the screen
shows the autofocus indicator at the center as the
camera automatically focuses on the center of the
screen. When you tap another area on the screen,
the indicator will move to where you tapped and
the camera will automatically focus on that area.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
shown on the viewfinder screen, you will also see
the remaining photo shots or remaining video
recording duration on the upper-right side of the
screen.
1
2
3
4
2. You can do the following:
Ⅲ To slowly zoom in or out, slide your finger up or
down the viewfinder screen. You can also drag
your finger along the zoom bar.
1. Go Back to the live camera or camcorder screen.
2. Delete the captured image or video.
3. Share the captured photo or video to another
phone or your computer using Bluetooth, send it
by email or multimedia message, or select a social
network where you want to upload it.
4. View the captured image or video in Gallery.
Ⅲ Tap
Ⅲ Tap
to zoom in to the highest magnification.
to zoom out to the actual size.
Zooming
Before taking a photo or video, you can first use the
onscreen zoom bar to zoom in or out of your subject.
3. After you’re done, wait for a few seconds for the
zoom bar to automatically disappear from the
screen. You can also tap the zoom button again or
tap the viewfinder screen to hide it.
1. To display the onscreen zoom bar, tap the zoom
button . You can also slide your finger up or
down the viewfinder screen. While the zoom bar is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
121
3. On the Viewfinder screen, tap the flash button
repeatedly to select a camera flash mode
depending on your lighting conditions:
Face Detection
The device’s camera can automatically recognize faces
and adjust the focus using the autofocus feature.
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
Auto flash
Flash on
Flash off
4. Frame your subject on the screen.
Tip: Hold the device vertically when taking portrait shots or
hold the device horizontally when taking landscape
shots. Then you will not need to rotate the photo after
capturing it.
Note: Face detection does not work in video mode.
5. You can either let the camera autofocus on the
center of the screen, or you can touch another
area on the screen that you want to focus on.
Taking Pictures
1. Press
and tap
> Camera.
6. Tap
to take the photo.
2. Before taking the photo, you can zoom in on your
7. Choose what you want to do with the photo you’ve
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Flash FAQ
Capturing Videos
Why doesn’t the Camera flash turn on?
1. Press
and tap
> Camcorder.
The flash light quickly consumes battery power. To
save battery power, the camera disables the flash light
or locks it to Flash off mode (even when you have set it
to Auto flash or Flash on) when one of the following
occurs:
2. On the viewfinder screen, tap to open the menu
panel.
3. Tap
in the menu panel to display the Settings
menu. Tap Resolution > 720p for the highest quality
recording.
ⅷ You have an incoming call. If you have set the flash
light to Flash on, it turns back on after you answer
and end the call.
4. Frame your subject on the screen.
5. You can either let the camcorder autofocus on the
center of the screen, or you can touch another
area on the screen that you want to focus on.
ⅷ Your device’s battery level reaches 20% or lower.
Recharge the battery so that the camera can have
enough battery power to use the flash light.
6. Tap
to start capturing video.
ⅷ Cold weather lowers battery performance and affects
the flash light. To make sure the camera has enough
battery life to power up the flash light, keep your
device warm. When not in use, put the device inside
your jacket to keep it warm, and try to avoid sudden
temperature changes that may affect battery
performance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
123
Capture
duration
Recording indicator
Changing Basic Settings
1. On the viewfinder screen, tap to open the menu
panel.
7. Tap
again to stop capturing.
2. To change basic camera settings, tap one of these
icons in the menu panel:
8. Choose what you want to do with the video you’ve
Ⅲ Exposure
There’s a brightness bar that allows you to adjust
the brightness level. Drag up or down the
brightness bar to increase or decrease
brightness.
Camera Settings
Open the menu panel to change the camera settings.
You can also switch between photo and video modes
from the menu panel.
Ⅲ Image properties
Drag each of the slider bars to adjust the contrast,
saturation, and sharpness.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Resolution: Lets you select a photo or video
resolution to use for capturing.
Ⅲ Effect
You can apply a special effect to photos and
videos that you will capture. Scroll through the
Effect menu and choose from effects such as
adding a sepia tone, solarization, and posterizing.
Ⅲ Widescreen (photo mode only): Lets you change
the ratio between the width and height of your
pictures. When this check box is selected
(default), photo resolutions available for selection
are in a 3:2 ratio and you can use the entire
viewfinder screen to frame your subject. When not
selected, photo resolutions available for selection
are in a standard 4:3 ratio.
Changing Advanced Settings
1. On the viewfinder screen, tap to open the menu
panel.
Ⅲ Quality (photo mode only): Lets you select the
quality level to use for capturing photos.
2. Tap
in the menu panel to display the Settings
menu and access more camera settings. You can
change the following settings from the Settings
menu:
Ⅲ Self-timer (photo mode only): Lets you select take
a self-portrait or group photo; you can set the self-
timer to either 2 seconds or 10 seconds.
Ⅲ White balance: Lets you change the white balance
to enable the camera to capture colors more
accurately by adjusting to your current lighting
environment. White balance settings include:
Auto, Incandescent, Fluorescent, Daylight, and
Cloudy.
Ⅲ Geo-tag photos (photo mode only): Lets you store
the GPS location in your captured photos.
Ⅲ Encoding type (video mode only): Lets you
choose the type of compression to use when
capturing video.
Ⅲ ISO (photo mode only): Lets you choose an ISO
level or set it to Auto. Higher ISO numbers are
better for taking pictures in low light conditions.
Ⅲ Recording length (video mode only): Lets you set
the maximum duration or file size for capturing
video.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125
Ⅲ Record with audio (video mode only): Lets you
choose whether to record audio when capturing
videos.
Ⅲ Face detection: Allows the camera to recognize
faces and automatically adjust the focus. Face
detection is turned off when you disable
Auto Focus.
Ⅲ Metering mode: Lets you set how the camera
measures the amount of light to calculate the best
exposure:
Ⅲ Shutter sound: Allows you to select whether the
camera plays a shutter sound when you press the
shutter release.
●
●
●
Spot metering mode allows the camera to
measure light around the focus point.
Ⅲ Time stamp (photo mode only): Lets you add the
date and time to captured photos.
Center area mode allows the camera to
measure light in the center.
Ⅲ Grid (photo mode only): Allows you to display a
grid on the viewfinder screen so you can easily
frame and center your subject before taking the
photo.
Average mode allows the camera to measure
light in the whole image.
Ⅲ Review duration: Lets you specify how long a
captured photo or video is displayed on the
review screen before the camera changes back to
the viewfinder screen.
Ⅲ Reset to default: Lets you change the camera
back to default settings.
Closing Camera
Ⅲ Flicker adjustment: Lets you reduce flicker when
taking indoor shots under fluorescent lighting.
Keep this setting on Auto or manually set it to
match the frequency (50Hz or 60Hz) of the
electrical power used for the country you are in.
On the camera screen, press
or
.
Ⅲ Auto Focus: Enables or disables centered
autofocus. Autofocus is enabled by default.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the
microSD card, Gallery will display these folders as
separate albums.
Viewing Pictures and Videos Using
Gallery
Using the Gallery application, you can view photos and
watch videos that you’ve taken with your device’s
camera, downloaded, or copied onto your storage
card. You can also take a look at your photos and your
friends’ photos that are on your social networks
(Facebook and Flickr only).
1
2
For photos that are on your storage card, you can do
basic editing such as rotating and cropping. You can
also easily make a photo as your contact picture or
wallpaper and share photos with your friends.
3
4
Opening Gallery
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Gallery.
The Gallery application opens in the Albums tab where
your photos and videos are organized by albums for
easy viewing.
1. Camera shots lets you view photos and videos that
are stored in the camera’s folder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
127
2. All photos lets you view all photos that are stored in
all the folders on the storage card.
Viewing Photos and Videos
After selecting an album from the Albums tab, you can
browse through the photos and videos of that album
either in filmstrip or grid view. Tap a photo or video to
view it in full screen.
3. All videos lets you view all videos that are stored in
all the folders on the storage card.
4. Photos and videos that you set as your favorites
will be grouped under Favorites.
By default, photos and videos are presented in a
horizontal filmstrip. Drag left or right across the filmstrip
to go through the photos and videos.
Photos or videos that are under the root path of your
storage card (that are not contained in folders) are
grouped in Others.
Folders in your storage card that contain photos and
videos will also be treated as albums and will be listed
below the preset albums. The actual folder names will
be used as the album names. If you have downloaded
any photos and videos, these will be placed in the All
downloads album.
When viewing pictures in Gallery, scroll up the screen
to view more albums. Simply tap an album to view the
photos or videos in that album.
Note: Depending on the number of pictures stored on the
microSD card, it may take some time for Gallery to load
all your photos on the screen.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the filmstrip view, press
to browse photos and videos by thumbnails. Drag up
or down to scroll through the thumbnails.
and then tap Grid view
Zooming In or Out on a Photo
There are two ways you can zoom in or out of a photo:
ᮣ
Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap
the screen twice quickly again to zoom out.
– or –
You can also use pinch and spread to zoom in or
details.)
Watching Video
The screen automatically switches to landscape mode
when you play a video. Use the onscreen controls to
play, pause, or stop the video.
To change back to displaying photos and videos in a
filmstrip, press
and then tap Filmstrip view.
Note: Whether you’re in filmstrip or grid view, you can press
and hold on a photo or video to open a selection menu
and choose what to do with the photo or video.
If you want to select another album, tap
the Albums tab.
to return to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
129
The video is displayed in full screen size. You can tap
to make it best fit on the screen based on the video
size. Tap the button again to change back to full screen
size.
2. Tap the Facebook tab.
3. Tap your account name or your friend’s account
on the list to view the pictures in the account.
You can view photos in your online albums the same
way you view photos on your storage card.
You can play these high-definition MP4 video formats
in Gallery:
Viewing Photos on Flickr
Ⅲ H.263 profile 0 @ 30 fps, WVGA (800x480), max
2 Mbps
You need to be logged in to your Flickr account to view
Flickr photos.
Ⅲ MPEG-4 simple profile @ 30 fps, 720p
(1280x720), max 6 Mbps
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
Ⅲ H.264 baseline profile @ 30 fps, 720p (1280x720),
max 6 Mbps
2. Tap the Flickr tab.
You may be asked to give authorization for the
application to connect to the Flickr website. If this
happens, you need to give authorization to access
your Flickr account.
Viewing Photos in Your Social Networks
Using Gallery, you can view your photos and your
social network friends’ photos (Facebook and Flickr
only).
3. Tap your account name or your friend’s account
on the list to view the photos in the account.
Viewing Photos on Facebook
You can view photos in your online albums the same
way you view photos on your storage card.
You need to be logged in to your Facebook account to
view Facebook photos.
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cropping a Photo
Working with Photos
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
Whether you’re browsing photos in filmstrip or grid
view in the Gallery application, you can press and hold
on a photo to open a selection menu and choose what
to do with it. You can choose to delete the photo, rotate
or crop it, and more.
2. On the Albums tab, tap an album.
3. Choose whether to browse photos and videos in
the album in filmstrip or grid view. (For more
information, see “Viewing Photos and Videos” on
Rotating and Saving a Photo
4. Press and hold on the photo that you want to crop.
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
5. In the menu that opens, tap Crop. A crop box then
appears on the photo.
2. On the Albums tab, tap an album.
3. Choose whether to browse photos and videos in
the album in filmstrip or grid view. (For more
information, see “Viewing Photos and Videos” on
4. Press and hold on the photo that you want to
rotate.
5. In the menu that opens, tap Rotate, and then select
either Rotate left or Rotate right.
Tip: You can also rotate a photo while you’re viewing it in full
6. To adjust the crop box size, press and hold the
edge of the box. When directional arrows appear,
screen. Press
, tap Rotate, and then select either
Rotate left or Rotate right.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
131
drag your finger inward to or outward to resize the
crop box.
Sending Photos or Videos by Email
You can send several photos, videos, or both in an
email message. They are added as file attachments in
your email.
7. To move the crop box to the part of the photo that
you want to crop, drag the crop box to the desired
position.
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
8. Tap Save to apply the changes to the picture.
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos
you want to share.
The cropped picture is saved on the storage card as a
copy. The original picture remains unedited.
3. Tap
and then on the Share options menu, tap
Gmail or Mail.
Tip: You can also crop a photo while you’re viewing it in full
screen. Press
, tap More > Crop, and follow the
same cropping steps as above.
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and
then tap Next.
Sharing Photos and Videos
5. Compose your message and then tap Send.
The Gallery application lets you send photos and
videos using email or multimedia messages. You can
share photos on your social networks (such as
Facebook, Flickr, Picasa, and Twitter) and share videos
on YouTube. You can also send them to another phone
or your computer using Bluetooth.
Note: If you selected Mail and you have multiple email
accounts, the default email account will be used.
Sending a Photo or Video by Multimedia
Message
Although you can send several photos or videos in a
multimedia message, it may be better to just send one
at a time, especially if the files are large in size.
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos
you want to share.
Bluetooth device so the files can be sent. For more
3. Tap
and then on the Share options menu, tap
Messages.
Sharing Photos on Facebook for HTC Sense
You need to be logged in to your Facebook account to
upload photos.
4. Tap the photo or video you want to send. The
photo or video is automatically added into the
multimedia message.
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that contains the photos you want to
5. Compose your message and then tap Send.
share.
Sending Photos or Videos Using Bluetooth
3. Tap
and then on the Share options menu, tap
Facebook for HTC Sense.
You can select several photos, videos, or both and
send them to someone’s phone or your computer
using Bluetooth.
4. Select the photos you want to share and then tap
Next.
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
5. Add a caption for the photos and then tap Upload.
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos
you want to share.
6. Select which album to upload to and set privacy
settings for the uploaded pictures. Tap Done.
3. Tap
and then on the Share options menu, tap
Bluetooth.
Sharing Photos on Facebook for Android
You need to be logged in to your Facebook account to
upload photos. When using Facebook for Android, you
can only upload one photo at a time.
4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and
then tap Next.
In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on
Bluetooth on your device and connect to the receiving
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
133
2. Tap the album that contains the photos you want to
Note: If you are not logged in to your Flickr account, you will
be prompted to log in and download the HTC Flickr
Downloader application. Follow the on-screen
instructions to proceed.
share.
3. Tap
and then on the Share options menu, tap
Facebook.
6. Select which album to upload to and set privacy
settings for the uploaded pictures. Tap Done.
4. Select the photo you want to share and then tap
Next.
5. Add a caption for the photo and then tap Upload.
6. Check the status bar for the upload information.
Sharing Photos on Picasa
You need to be signed in to a Google Account to
upload pictures to the Picasa™ photo organizing
service.
Sharing Photos on Flickr
You need to be logged in to your Flickr account to
upload pictures.
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos
you want to share.
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos
you want to share.
3. Tap
Picasa.
and then on the Share options menu, tap
3. Tap
Flickr.
and then on the Share options menu, tap
4. Select the pictures you want to share and then tap
Next.
4. Select the pictures you want to share and then tap
Next.
5. Select the online album where you want to upload
the pictures, or tap
to create a new album.
5. Add a description for the photos and then tap
Upload.
6. Tap Upload. You can view the photos online at
http://picasaweb.google.com.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sharing Videos on YouTube
Listening to Music
You can share your videos by uploading them to
YouTube™. Before you do this, you must create a
YouTube account and sign in to that account on your
device.
You can enjoy listening to songs and music on your
device using the Music application. To use the Music
application, you first need to copy music files to your
storage card. To find out how to copy files to the
storage card, see “Your Device’s microSD Card” on
1. Press
and tap
> Gallery.
2. Tap the album that contains the photos or videos
you want to share.
Playing Music
To open the Music application, press
tap > Music.
3. Tap
and then on the Share options menu, tap
YouTube.
and
4. Select the videos you want to share and then tap
Next.
The Music application opens in the Playback screen.
Use the onscreen controls to control music playback,
select a song to play, repeat songs, and more. On the
Playback screen, you can also swipe your finger from
right to left or left to right to go to the next or previous
music album.
5. Enter the prompted information, such as
description and tags, and select a privacy option.
6. Tap Upload.
Closing Gallery
ᮣ
While in the Gallery screen, press
application.
to close the
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Tap to go to the previous song in the Now playing
list.
7
1
6. Tap to go to the Library.
7. Tap to cycle through the repeat modes: repeat all
songs ( ), repeat current song ( ), and don’t
repeat ( ).
2
3
8. Tap to pause or resume playing the song.
9. Tap to go to the next song in the Now playing list.
10. Shows the remaining time.
8
9
4
11. Tap to toggle between showing the Now playing
10
11
list and Playback screen.
5
6
When you are playing music and the screen turns off,
you can control the music playback right from the Lock
screen when you “wake up” the device by pressing
. If you do not see the playback controls on the
Lock screen, tap anywhere on the screen to display the
playback controls.
1. Tap to turn shuffle on or off. (Shuffle is off when
button is gray.)
Tip: You can also swipe your finger from right to left or left to
right to go to the next or previous song in the
Now playing list.
2. Shows the progress bar.
3. Press and drag to jump to another part of the song.
4. Shows the elapsed time.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you tap a song in a category to play it, the Now
playing list is updated with the song list from your
selected category.
Note: Press the volume up or down button to adjust the
playback volume.
Browsing Music in the Library
Creating Playlists
Tap
at the bottom-left corner of the Playback screen
Personalize your music experience by creating music
playlists. Make a playlist containing just your favorite
songs or create one to match your mood for the day.
You can make as many playlists as you like.
or the Now playing list screen to go to the Library.
In the Library, your music is organized into different
categories such as Artists, Albums, Playlists, Genres,
Composers, and more. Select a category by tapping
one of the category tabs at the bottom of the screen.
1. Press
2. Tap
and tap
> Music.
at the bottom-left corner of the screen to
go to the Library.
3. In the Library, tap or drag on the bottom row to go
to the Playlists category.
4. Tap Add playlist.
5. Enter a playlist name, and then tap Add songs to
playlist.
6. Tap or drag on the bottom row to change among
the different categories. If you go to the Songs
category, you can see a complete list of songs on
your storage card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
7. Select the check boxes of songs you want to add
to the playlist and then tap Add.
4. Go to the Songs category or any other category.
5. Select the songs you want to add to the playlist
and then tap Add.
8. Tap Save.
Tip: While playing back a song, press
and then tap Add
to playlist to add the current song to a playlist.
Playing the Songs in a Playlist
1. In the Library, tap or drag on the bottom row to go
To rearrange the songs in a playlist:
to the Playlists category.
1. In the Library, tap or drag on the bottom row to go
to the Playlists category.
2. Tap a playlist to open it.
3. Tap the first song or any song in the playlist.
2. Tap a playlist to open it.
When you tap a song in the list to play it, the Now
playing list is updated with the song list from your
playlist.
3. Press
and then tap Change order.
4. Press and hold
want to move. When the row is highlighted, drag it
to its new position, and then release.
at the end of the song title you
Managing Your Playlists
After creating a playlist, you can add more songs to it,
rearrange their order, and more.
5. Tap Done.
To delete a song in a playlist:
To add songs to a playlist:
1. In the Library, tap or drag on the bottom row to go
to the Playlists category.
1. In the Library, tap or drag on the bottom row to go
to the Playlists category.
2. Tap a playlist to open it.
2. Tap a playlist to open it.
3. Press
and then tap Remove songs.
3. Press
and then tap Add songs.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Select the songs you want to delete and then tap
Remove.
Note: If you select Contact ringtone, you need to select the
contacts you want to associate the song with in the
next screen.
To delete a playlist:
To confirm that a song was added as a ring tone:
1. In the Library, tap or drag on the bottom row to go
to the Playlists category.
1. From the Home screen, press
Settings.
and then tap
2. Press
and then tap Delete playlists.
3. Select the playlists to delete and then tap Delete.
2. On the Settings screen, tap Sound > Phone
ringtone. The song should be listed as an option.
Setting a Song as a Ring Tone
You can select a song from the Music application’s
Library and set it as your device’s ring tone or a ring
tone for a certain contact.
Sending Music Using Bluetooth
You can select a song from the Music application’s
Library and send it to someone’s phone or your
computer using Bluetooth.
1. Press
2. Tap
and tap
> Music.
1. Press
2. Tap
and tap
> Music.
at the bottom-left corner of the screen to
go to the Library.
at the bottom-left corner of the screen to
go to the Library.
3. In the Library, select the song that you want to use
as ring tone and then play it back.
3. In the Library, select the song that you want to use
as ring tone and then play it back.
4. On the Playback screen, press
Set as ringtone.
and then tap
4. On the Playback screen, press
Share > Bluetooth.
and then tap
5. In the Set as ringtone options menu, tap Phone
ringtone or Contact ringtone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
139
In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on
Bluetooth on your device and connect to the receiving
Bluetooth device so the files can be sent. For more
information, see “Turning Bluetooth On or Off” on page
142.
1
2
10
9
About the Music Widget
You can use the Music widget to play music right from
your Home screen. To find out how you can add this
widget to your Home screen, see “Customizing the
1
3
4
8
7
6
Listening to the Radio
5
You can use the DFM Radio to listen to FM radio
stations on your device. You will first need to connect a
wired headset to the audio jack of your device to use
FM Radio. FM Radio uses the stereo headset as the FM
radio antenna.
1. FM radio frequency.
2. Drag to tune to a frequency on the FM band.
3. Tap to fine tune the radio frequency by -0.1 MHz.
Note: A wired headset is not included with your device. It
4. Tap to search the FM band for the previous FM
must be purchased separately.
station.
5. View the All presets list.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Tap to change the name of the current station you
Ⅲ Press the volume buttons on the side of the
phone to adjust the volume.
are tuned to.
Ⅲ Press
to set more FM Radio options.
7. Tap to search the FM band for the next FM station.
8. Tap to fine tune the radio frequency by +0.1 MHz.
9. Radio signal strength.
Adding Station Names
1. Press
and tap
> FM Radio.
10. Turn FM Radio off or on.
2. Tune in to the desired FM station, and then tap
.
Listening to an FM Station
3. Enter a station name for the selected FM station,
and then tap Save.
1. Press
and tap
> FM Radio.
The first time you open FM Radio, it automatically
scans for available FM stations, saves them as
presets, and plays the first FM station found.
Minimizing or Turning Off FM Radio
ᮣ
Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Press
to minimize and keep FM Radio running
Note: To repeat scanning and saving of FM stations, press
, and then tap Scan & Save.
in the background so you can listen to the radio
while going to another screen.
2. Press
3. On the FM Radio screen, you can:
Ⅲ Tap and then select a station you want to
listen to.
Ⅲ Tap
station, or
station.
to stop the auto-scan.
Ⅲ On the FM Radio screen, tap
on the upper-
right corner of the FM Radio screen to turn off FM
Radio.
to go to the previous available FM
to go to the next available FM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
printers, and wireless phones. The Bluetooth
communication range is usually approximately 30 feet.
2I. Bluetooth
Turning Bluetooth On or Off
1. Press
networks.
>
, and then tap Settings > Wireless &
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ 2. Select or clear the Bluetooth check box.
An even easier way to turn Bluetooth on or off is with
the Bluetooth widget on the Home screen. For
instructions on adding a widget to the Home screen,
Note: Turn off Bluetooth when not in use to conserve battery
power, or in places where using a wireless device is
prohibited, such as aboard an aircraft and in hospitals.
ࡗ ࡗ Changing the Device Name
The device name identifies your device to other
devices.
Using Bluetooth
1. Press
networks.
>
, and then tap Settings > Wireless &
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology
that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of
Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and hands-free
car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers,
2. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it
to turn Bluetooth on.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap Bluetooth settings > Device name.
4. Tap Scan for devices. Your device will start to scan
for Bluetooth devices within range.
4. Enter the name for your device in the dialog box,
and then tap OK.
5. When you see the name of your headset displayed
in the Bluetooth devices section, tap the name.
Your device then automatically tries to pair with the
headset.
Connecting a Bluetooth Headset or Car Kit
You can listen to music over a Bluetooth stereo
headset, or have hands-free conversations using a
compatible Bluetooth headset or car kit. It’s the same
procedure to set up stereo audio and hands-free
devices.
6. If automatic pairing fails, enter the passcode
supplied with your headset.
The pairing and connection status is displayed below
the hands-free headset or car kit name in the Bluetooth
devices section. When the Bluetooth headset or car kit
is connected to your device, the Bluetooth connected
For you to listen to music with your headset or car kit,
the headset or car kit must support the A2DP Bluetooth
profile.
icon
is displayed in the status bar. Depending on
the type of headset or car kit you have connected, you
can then start using the headset or car kit to listen to
music or make and receive phone calls.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Wireless &
networks > Bluetooth settings.
2. If Bluetooth is not switched on, tap the Bluetooth
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth-
compatible devices.
check box to select it.
3. Make sure that the headset is discoverable, so that
your device can find the headset. Refer to the
instructions that came with the headset to find out
how to set it to discoverable mode.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reconnecting a Headset or Car Kit
Disconnecting or Unpairing From a
Bluetooth Device
When you have paired a headset with your device, you
should be able to reconnect it automatically by turning
on Bluetooth on your device and then turning on the
headset. However, sometimes you will need to
reconnect manually, for example if you have been
using your headset with another Bluetooth device.
To disconnect a Bluetooth device:
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Wireless &
networks > Bluetooth settings.
2. In the Bluetooth devices section, tap the device to
disconnect.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Wireless &
networks > Bluetooth settings.
3. Tap Disconnect.
2. If Bluetooth is not switched on, tap the Bluetooth
check box to switch it on.
To unpair from a Bluetooth device:
You can make your device forget its pairing connection
with another Bluetooth device. To connect to the other
device again, you may need to enter or confirm a
passcode again.
3. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.
4. Tap the headset’s name in the Bluetooth devices
section.
5. If prompted to enter a passcode, try 0000 or 1234,
or consult the headset or car kit documentation to
find the passcode.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Wireless &
networks > Bluetooth settings.
2. In the Bluetooth devices section, tap the device to
unpair.
If you still cannot reconnect to the headset or car kit,
follow the instructions in “Disconnecting or Unpairing
From a Bluetooth Device” in this chapter, and then
follow the instructions in “Connecting a Bluetooth
3. Tap Unpair.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
documentation for instructions on receiving
information over Bluetooth.
Sending and Receiving Information Using
Bluetooth
You can use Bluetooth to transfer information between
your device and another Bluetooth-enabled device
such as a phone or notebook computer. The first time
you transfer information between your device and
another device, you need to enter or confirm a security
passcode. After that, your device and the other device
are paired, and you will not need to exchange
2. On the device, open the application that contains
the information or file you want to send. For
example, if you want to send a photo, press
and tap
> Gallery.
3. Follow the steps for the type of item you want to
send:
Ⅲ Photo or video (in Camera). After capturing a
photo, on the preview screen, tap the Share
passcodes to transfer information in the future.
button
Ⅲ Photos and videos (in Gallery). On the Albums tab
, tap an album. Tap the Share button , tap
, and then tap Bluetooth.
Sending Information From Your Device to
Another Device
Bluetooth, select the items you want to share, and
then tap Next.
You can send the following types of information,
depending on the device you are sending to:
Ⅲ Calendar event. In the Calendar’s Day view,
Agenda view, or Week view, press and hold the
event, and then tap Share vCalendar > Bluetooth.
ⅷ Images and videos
ⅷ Calendar events
ⅷ Contacts
Ⅲ Contact. On the People screen’s All tab
,
ⅷ Audio files
press and hold the contact, and then tap Send
contact as vCard. Tap the down arrow icon, and
then select Bluetooth from the displayed list.
1. Set the receiving device to discoverable mode. You
may also need to set it to “Receive Beams” or
“Receive Files”. Refer to the device’s
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Music track. With the track displayed on the Now
Ⅲ If you send another file type to a Windows
computer, it is normally saved in the Bluetooth
Exchange folder within your personal document
folders.
playing screen, press
Share > Bluetooth.
, and then tap
Ⅲ Voice recording. On the main Voice Recorder
screen, tap the Share button
Bluetooth.
, and then tap
● On Windows XP, the path may be:
C:\Documents and Settings\[your username]\
My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange.
4. If you are prompted to turn on Bluetooth, tap Yes.
5. Tap the name of the receiving device.
● On Windows Vista, the path may be:
C:\Users\[your username]\Documents.
6. If prompted, accept the connection on the
receiving device, and enter the same passcode on
both your device and the other device, or confirm
the auto-generated passcode.
Ⅲ If you send a file to another device, the saved
location may depend on the file type. For
example, if you send an image file to another
wireless phone, it may be saved in a folder
named “Images.”
7. On the receiving device, accept the file.
The location where the information is saved
depends on the type of information and the
receiving device:
Ⅲ If you send a calendar event or contact, it is
normally added directly to the corresponding
application on the receiving device. For example,
if you send a calendar event to a compatible
phone, the event is shown in that phone’s
calendar application.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Tap OK.
Receiving Information From Another Device
8. When your device receives a file transfer request
notification, slide down the notifications panel, and
then tap Accept.
Your device is capable of receiving a wide variety of file
types with Bluetooth, including photos, music tracks,
and documents such as PDFs.
9. When a file is transferred, a notification is
displayed. To open the file immediately, slide down
the notifications panel, and then tap the relevant
notification.
To receive files from another device, you need to have
a microSD card installed in your device.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Wireless &
networks > Bluetooth settings.
When you open a received file, what happens next
depends on the file type:
2. If Bluetooth is not switched on, tap the Bluetooth
check box to switch it on.
Ⅲ Media files and documents are usually opened
directly in a compatible application. For example,
if you open a music track, it starts playing in the
Music application.
3. Tap the Discoverable check box.
4. On the sending device, send one or more files to
your device. Refer to the device’s documentation
for instructions on sending information over
Bluetooth.
Ⅲ For a vCalendar file, select the calendar where
you want to save the event, and then tap Import.
The vCalendar is added to your Calendar events.
(For more information on using Calendar, see
5. If prompted, enter the same passcode on both
your device and the other device, or confirm the
auto-generated passcode. A Bluetooth
Ⅲ For a vCard contact file, if there are multiple vCard
files on your storage card, you can choose to
import one, several, or all of those contacts to
your contacts list.
authorization request is displayed on your device.
6. If you want to automatically receive files from the
sending device in future, select the Always trust
device check box.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The microSD card contents appear on the other
device’s screen.
Using Bluetooth FTP Server
Bluetooth FTP Server allows other devices with
Bluetooth FTP profiles to view, access, copy, and delete
files from your device’s microSD card.
Adding the Bluetooth Received Folder to
the Home Screen
You can add a folder to your device’s screen that
shows all files you have received with Bluetooth.
Note: To use Bluetooth FTP Server, you need to have a
microSD card installed in your device.
To turn Blueooth FTP Server on and allow access to the
microSD card contents:
1. Press
and tap
.
2. On the Add to Home screen, tap Folder > Bluetooth
Received.
1. Press
>
, and then tap Settings > Wireless &
networks > Bluetooth settings > Advanced Settings.
3. Press and hold the Bluetooth received folder icon,
2. Select the FTP Server check box.
and drag it to the Home screen position you want.
3. Pair your device with the other Bluetooth device
that wants to access the microSD card contents.
For more information about Bluetooth pairing, see
4. To view the folder contents, tap the folder icon. To
open a file, tap the file name.
4. When the other device attempts to access your
device’s microSD card, a Bluetooth Authorization
Request appears on the screen. Tap Accept. If you
want to allow the connecting device to always
access your device’s microSD card, select the
Always check box before you tap Accept.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Press
and tap
> Voicemail.
3A. Sprint Service:
The Basics
2. In the Personalize your voicemail window, tap
Personalize now.
3. Your device will automatically connect with Sprint
Voicemail service. Follow the voice prompts to:
ࡗ ࡗ Ⅲ Create your password.
Ⅲ Record your name announcement.
Ⅲ Record your greeting.
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Note: Voicemail Password
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a
password when setting up your voicemail to protect
against unauthorized access. Without a password,
anyone who has access to your phone is able to
access your voicemail messages.
Voicemail
Voicemail Notification
There are several ways your device alerts you to a new
message:
ⅷ By sounding the assigned ringer type.
Setting Up Your Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered
calls to your voicemail, even if your device is in use or
turned off. You should set up your Sprint Voicemail and
personal greeting as soon as your device is activated.
ⅷ By displaying
at the top of your screen.
ⅷ By flashing the notification LED (if enabled).
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Another Phone to Access Messages
New Voicemail Message Alerts
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
When you receive a new voice message, you will see a
message in the Notification panel (see “Notifications
2. When your voicemail answers, tap
3. Enter your passcode.
.
Note: When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint
Network, you may not receive notification of new
voicemail messages. Sprint recommends that you
periodically check your voicemail by dialing your area
code + your wireless phone number. When your
Tip: When you call voicemail from another phone, you first
hear the header information (date, time, and sender
information) for the message. To skip directly to the
message, tap
during the header.
voicemail answers, press
and enter your passcode.
Roaming rates apply when you access voicemail while
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network.
Clearing the Message Icon
Your device accepts messages even when it is turned off.
However, your device notifies you of new messages only
when it is turned on and you are in a Sprint service area.
Your device may temporarily continue to display the
message icon after you have checked your voice and
text messages.
ᮣ
Open the Notifications panel (see “Notifications
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages
You can review your messages directly from your
wireless device or from any other touch-tone phone.
Using Your Device
1. Press
and tap
> Voicemail.
2. Tap on a message to play it back.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voicemail Key Guide
Text Messaging (SMS) and
Multimedia Messaging (MMS)
Here’s a quick guide to your keypad functions while
listening to voicemail messages.
With Text Messaging (SMS), you can send and receive
instant text messages between your wireless device
and another messaging-ready phone.
Date/Time
Replay
Erase
Send Reply
Rewind
Advance
Forward
Save
In addition, Text Messaging includes a variety of preset
messages, such as “I’m running late, I’m on my way,”
that make composing messages fast and easy. Use
your device to customize your own preset messages
(up to 160 characters).
Return Call
Help
Multimedia messages, or MMS, can contain text and
pictures, recorded voice, audio or video files, picture
slideshows, contact cards (vCard), or appointments
(vCalendar).
Cancel
Skip
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for
Text Messaging and SMS Voice Messaging.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Tap the “Tap to add text” box and then start
composing your message.
Composing Text Messages
1. Press
and tap
> Messages.
2. On the All messages screen, tap New message.
The Compose screen opens.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:
Ⅲ Enter phone numbers directly in the To field. If
you’re sending the message to several phone
numbers, separate the phone numbers with a
comma. As you enter information, any matching
phone numbers from your contacts list are
displayed. Tap a match to enter that number or
address directly.
Ⅲ Tap the
icon, and then select the phone
numbers of the contacts to whom you want to
send the message. You can also select contact
groups as recipients. When you have selected all
the message recipients, tap Done.
Note: A counter appears at the top of the Send button(
) to
tell you how many characters you have entered and
how many characters are left. Once you go over the
160-character limit, a new message is created but
automatically joined into one when received.
5. When done, tap
to send the text message.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Tap the “Tap to add text” box, press
Quick text. (You will see the list of preset
messages.)
and tap
Preset Messages
Preset messages make it easy to compose text
messages.
5. To add a new message, press
Enter your message and tap OK.
and tap Insert.
To add or edit preset messages:
1. Press
and tap
>Messages.
– or –
2. On the All messages screen, tap New message.
The Compose screen opens.
To edit a preset message, press
Tap the message you want to edit, edit the
and tap Edit.
message, and then tap OK.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can either:
Ⅲ Enter phone numbers in the To field. If you’re
sending the message to several phone numbers,
separate the phone numbers with commas. As
you enter information, any matching phone
numbers from your contacts list are displayed.
Tap a match to enter that number or address.
– or –
Ⅲ Tap the
icon, and then select the phone
numbers of the contacts to whom you want to
send the message. You can also select contact
groups as recipients. When you have selected all
the message recipients, tap Done.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Multimedia Message (MMS)
5. Press
and then tap Attach.
1. Press
and tap
> Messages.
6. In the Attach window, select from the following file
attachments:
2. On the All messages screen, tap New message.
The Compose screen opens.
Ⅲ Picture. Select Camera to take a photo and attach
it, or Gallery to attach a photo from your storage
card.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can either:
Ⅲ Enter phone numbers or email addresses in the
To field. If you’re sending the message to several
recipients, separate the phone numbers or email
addresses with commas. As you enter
Ⅲ Video. Select Camcorder to capture a video and
attach it, or Videos to attach a video from your
storage card.
Ⅲ Audio. Select Voice Recorder to make a voice
recording and attach it, or Music & sounds to
attach a music file or voice recording from your
storage card.
information, any matching phone numbers or
addresses from your contacts list are displayed.
Tap a match to enter that number or address.
– or –
Ⅲ App recommendation. Choose an app you’ve
installed from Android Market that you want to
share with others. The URL from which the app
can be downloaded will be inserted to your
message.
Ⅲ Tap the
icon, and then select the contacts to
whom you want to send the message. You can
also select contact groups as recipients. When
you have selected all the message recipients, tap
Done.
Ⅲ Location. Add your current location (requires GPS
to be turned on), or a location you pick on a map
to your message. (See “Google Maps” on page
232 for more details.)
Note: You can add a subject line by pressing
tapping Add subject.
and then
4. Tap the “Tap to add text” box, and then start
composing your message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
Ⅲ Contact (vCard). Select a contact from your
device, and then select which contact information
you want to attach.
4. To compose your slideshow, do any of the
following:
Ⅲ Add a picture. Tap Insert picture.
Ⅲ Appointment (vCalendar). Select the calendar
event you want to attach.
Ⅲ Add a video. Press
(you cannot add both a picture and a video on
the same slide).
, and then tap Add video
Ⅲ Add music or a voice recording. Press
then tap Add audio.
, and
Tip: You can also tap
to attach an item to your MMS
message.
Ⅲ Add a caption. Tap the “Tap to add text” box.
Ⅲ Add a new slide. Tap Add slide.
7. To make changes to your attachment, tap
. You
can also press , then tap Remove to start over.
Ⅲ View the next or previous slide. Tap
or
8. Tap to send the MMS message.
.
Creating a Slideshow
Ⅲ Preview your slideshow. Press
tap Preview.
, and then
In a multimedia message, you can add slides, each
containing a photo, video, or audio.
Ⅲ For more options, press
and then tap More.
1. In the multimedia message you’re composing,
5. When finished, tap Done to attach the slideshow to
your message.
press
and then tap Attach > Slideshow.
2. On the Edit slideshow screen, tap Add slide.
3. Tap Slide 1.
6. When you have finished composing the
multimedia message, tap
.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A new message icon( ) also appears in the
Saving and Resuming a Draft Message
While composing a text or multimedia message,
notifications area of the status bar to notify you of a new
text or multimedia message. The Messages application
icon (if shown on the Home screen) also displays the
press
draft.
to automatically save your message as a
number of new messages
.
To resume composing the message:
To open the message, press and hold the status bar,
and then slide the status bar down to open the
Notifications panel. Tap the new message to open and
read it. For information on reading and replying to
this chapter.
1. On the All messages screen, press
tap Drafts.
, and then
2. Tap the message to resume editing it.
3. When you finish editing the message, tap
.
Managing Message Conversations
New Messages Notification
Text and multimedia messages that are sent to and
received from a contact (or a number) are grouped into
conversations or message threads in the All messages
screen. Threaded text or multimedia messages let you
see exchanged messages (similar to a chat program)
with a contact on the screen.
Depending on your notification settings, the device will
play a ring tone, vibrate, or display the message briefly
in the status bar when you receive a new text or
multimedia message. To change the notification for
new text and multimedia messages, see “Setting Text
and Multimedia Message Options” for details.
To read a text message:
Do one of the following:
Ⅲ On the All messages screen, tap the text
message or message thread to open and read it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
157
Ⅲ If you have a new message notification, press and
hold the status bar, and then slide the status bar
down to open the Notifications panel. Tap the new
message to open and read it.
3. Tap the attachment to open it. If the attachment is a
vCard contact, it is imported to your device’s
contacts list. For more information, see “About
People” on page 62. If the attachment is a
vCalendar file, you can choose the calendar where
you want to save the event. For information on
To return to the All messages screen from a text
message thread, press
and then tap All messages.
Note: To view the details of a particular message, in the
message thread, press and hold the message to open
the options menu, and then tap View message
details.
4. To save the attachment to the storage card, press
and hold the sender’s name or number, and then
tap Save [attachment type] on the options menu.
Note: When Auto-retrieve in MMS settings is disabled, only
the message header is downloaded. To download the
entire message, tap the Download button at the right
side of the message. For details, see “Setting Text and
Multimedia Message Options” later in this chapter.
If a message contains a link to a Web page, tap the
message and then tap the link to open it in the Web
browser.
If a message contains a phone number, tap the
message and then tap the phone number to dial the
number or add it to your contacts.
If you are concerned about the size of your data
downloads, check the multimedia message size before
you download it.
To view a multimedia message (MMS):
1. Press
and tap
> Messages.
To reply to a text or multimedia message:
2. On the All messages screen, tap a multimedia
message or message thread to open it.
1. Press
and tap
> Messages.
2. On the All messages screen, tap a text or
multimedia message thread to open it.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap the text box at the bottom of the screen, enter
your reply message, and then tap Send.
To delete a message thread:
1. Press and tap
> Messages.
Note: To reply to a text message with a multimedia message,
2. On the All messages screen, tap the message
thread that you want to delete.
open the text message, press
More > Add subject, or Attach. The text message is
and then tap
automatically converted into a multimedia message.
3. Press
, and then tap Delete.
4. When prompted to confirm, tap OK. Any locked
messages in the thread will not be deleted unless
you select the Delete locked messages check box.
To protect a message from deletion:
You can lock a message so that it will not be deleted
even if you delete the other messages in the
conversation.
To delete several message threads:
1. Press
and tap
> Messages.
1. Press
and tap
> Messages.
2. On the All messages screen, press
tap Delete.
, and then
2. On the All messages screen, tap a message
thread.
3. Select the message threads you want to delete.
3. Press and hold the message that you want to lock.
4. Tap Lock message on the options menu. A lock
4. Tap Delete. Any locked messages will not be
deleted.
icon
is displayed at the right hand side of the
message.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To delete a single message:
Storage settings
1. While viewing a message thread, press and hold
ⅷ Delete old messages: Automatically delete older
messages, except for locked messages, when the
set limits are reached.
the message that you want to delete.
2. If the message is locked, tap Unlock message on
the options menu, and then press and hold the
message to display the options menu again.
ⅷ Text message limit: Choose the maximum number of
text messages to store in each conversation thread.
(This does not include locked messages.)
3. Tap Delete message on the options menu.
4. When prompted to confirm, tap OK.
ⅷ Multimedia message limit: Choose the maximum
number of MMS messages to store in each
conversation thread. (This does not include locked
messages.)
To view contact details and communicate with a contact:
When you have received a message from someone in
your stored contacts, you can tap the contact’s photo or
icon in the message thread to open a menu of options.
Depending on the stored contact information, you can
view the contact details, phone or send an email
message to the contact, and more.
SMS settings
ⅷ Delivery reports: Receive a report on the delivery
status of your message.
ⅷ Priority setting: Set the message priority of text
messages sent.
Setting Text and Multimedia Message
Options
MMS settings
ⅷ Delivery reports: Receive a report on the delivery
status of your message.
1. Press
and tap
> Messages.
ⅷ Read reports: Receive a report whether each
recipient has read the message or deleted it without
reading.
2. On the All messages screen, press
tap Settings. You can set the following:
and then
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Auto-retrieve: Select this option to automatically
retrieve all your multimedia messages completely.
When selected, the multimedia message header
plus the message body and attachments will
automatically download to your device. If you clear
this check box, only the multimedia message header
will be retrieved and shown in your All messages
screen.
ⅷ Play notification sound: If you want the device to ring
when a new message arrives, select this option.
ⅷ Notification sound: Select a ring tone that is specific
to new text and multimedia messages. Note that the
ring tone briefly plays when selected.
ⅷ Vibrate: Select this option if you want the device to
vibrate when a new text or multimedia message
arrives.
ⅷ Roaming auto-retrieve: Automatically retrieve all your
messages completely when roaming. This may incur
significant phone charges.
Sent messages
ⅷ Sent notification: Select this option if you want to
receive a notification in the status bar when a
message is sent successfully.
ⅷ Priority setting: Set the message priority of text
messages sent.
ⅷ Maximum message size: Set the maximum file size of
a multimedia message. The multimedia message will
not be sent out if it exceeds the file size set here.
ⅷ Failure notification: Select this option if you want to
receive a notification in the status bar when a
message is not sent successfully.
ⅷ Connection settings: View various connection settings
such as the connection name and server address.
ⅷ Play notification sound: If you want the device to ring
when a sent or failure notification is received, select
this option.
Received messages
ⅷ Notification sound: Select a ring tone that is specific
to sent or failure notifications. Note that the ring tone
briefly plays when selected.
ⅷ Received notification: Select this option if you want to
receive a notification in the status bar when a new
text or multimedia message arrives.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
ⅷ Vibrate: Select this option if you want the device to
vibrate when a new text or multimedia message
arrives.
Caller ID
Caller ID identifies a caller before you answer the
device by displaying the number of the incoming call. If
you do not want your number displayed when you
make a call, follow these steps.
ⅷ Display message on screen: Set your phone to show
pop-up notifications (not just in the status bar) when
your messages are sent successfully or not. You can
also select None to disable this option.
1. Press
2. Tap
and tap
.
Adding the Messages Widget
.
3. Enter a phone number.
4. Tap
Add the Messages widget so you can read your
messages right on the Home screen.
.
To learn how to add widgets, refer to “Customizing the
To permanently block your number, call Sprint
Customer Service.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Call Waiting
Making a 3-Way Call
When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you to
incoming calls by sounding two beeps. Your device’s
screen informs you that another call is coming in and
displays the caller’s phone number (if it is available and
you are in digital mode).
With 3-Way Calling, you can talk to two people at the
same time. When using this feature, the normal airtime
rates will be charged for each of the two calls.
1. On the Phone screen, enter a number and
tap
.
To respond to an incoming call while you’re on a call:
2. Once you have established the connection,
press , tap Add call, and dial the number of the
ᮣ
Press
and then tap Flash. (This puts the first
second participant. (This puts the first caller on
hold and dials the second number.)
caller on hold and answers the second call.)
To switch back to the first caller:
Press and then tap Flash again.
3. When you’re connected to the second party,
ᮣ
press
and tap Merge calls.
Tip: For those calls where you don’t want to be interrupted,
you can temporarily disable Call Waiting by pressing
before placing your call. Call Waiting is
If one of the people you called hangs up during your
call, you and the remaining caller stay connected. If you
initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all callers
are disconnected.
automatically reactivated once you end the call.
To end the three-way call, tap
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
163
Call Forwarding
Roaming
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls
to another phone number – even when your device is
turned off. You can continue to make calls from your
device when you have activated Call Forwarding.
Roaming Icon
Your display screen always lets you know when you’re
off the Nationwide Sprint Network. Anytime you are
roaming, the device displays the roaming icon ( ).
Note: You are charged a higher rate for calls you have
forwarded.
Roaming on Other Digital Networks
To activate Call Forwarding:
When you’re roaming on digital networks, your call
quality and security will be similar to the quality you
receive when making calls on the Nationwide Sprint
Network. However, you may not be able to access
certain features, such as data services, depending on
the available network.
1. Press
2. Tap
and tap
.
.
3. Enter the area code and phone number to which
you want your calls forwarded.
Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the Nationwide Sprint
Network, your call is dropped. If your call is dropped in
an area where you think Sprint service is available, turn
your device off and on again to reconnect to the
network.
4. Tap
. (You will see a message and hear
a tone to confirm the activation of Call Forwarding.)
To deactivate Call Forwarding:
1. Press
2. Tap
3. Tap
and tap
.
.
. (You will see a message and hear
a tone to confirm the deactivation.)
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choose from two different settings on your dual-band
phone to control your roaming experience.
Checking for Voicemail Messages While
Roaming
1. Press
>
.
When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint
Network, you may not receive on-device notification of
new voicemail messages. Callers can still leave
messages, but you will need to periodically check your
voicemail for new messages if you are in a roaming
service area for an extended period of time.
2. Tap Settings > Wireless & networks >
Mobile networks.
3. Tap Roaming.
Ⅲ Sprint Only to access only the Sprint network and
prevent roaming on other networks.
1. Dial your area code + your phone number.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting,
Ⅲ Automatic to seek service on the Nationwide
Sprint Network. When Sprint service is
unavailable, the device searches for an alternate
system.
tap
.
3. Enter your passcode at the prompt and follow the
voice prompts.
Call Guard
When you return to the Nationwide Sprint Network,
voicemail notification will resume as normal.
Your device has two ways of alerting you when you are
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network: the
onscreen roaming icon and Call Guard. Call Guard
makes it easy to manage your roaming by requiring an
extra step before you can place or answer a roaming
call. (This additional step is not required when you
make or receive calls while on the Nationwide Sprint
Network.)
Setting Roam Mode
Your device allows you to control your roaming
capabilities. By using the Roaming menu option, you
can determine which signals your device accepts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
165
To turn Call Guard on or off:
1. Press
Data Roam Guard
>
.
Depending on service availability and roaming
agreements, your device may be able to access data
services while roaming on certain digital systems. Your
device automatically alerts you when you are roaming
off the Nationwide Sprint Network and try to use data
services, such as messaging.
2. Tap Settings > Wireless & networks >
Mobile networks.
3. Select the Call guard check box to turn on Call
Guard; clear the check box to turn off Call guard.
Note: Your device’s Call Guard is turned on by default.
Note: To turn Data Roam Guard off, press
>
, and
then tap Settings > Wireless & networks > Mobile
networks. Clear the Data Roam Guard option.
Voice dialing and speed dialing are not available when
you are roaming with Call Guard enabled.
To use data services when Data Roam Guard is active:
To place roaming calls with Call Guard on:
ᮣ
When a pop-up notification appears informing you
that data roam charges may apply, tap Roam to
connect.
1. On the Phone screen, dial your area code + the
seven-digit number and tap
.
2. Select Roam Call.
To answer incoming roaming calls with Call Guard on:
ᮣ
Tap Answer. (A message will be displayed notifying
you that roaming charges will apply.)
Note: If the Call Guard check box is selected, you need to
take extra steps to make and receive roaming calls.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ways of Connecting to the Internet
3B. Web and Data Services
Your device’s networking capabilities allow you to
wirelessly access the Internet or your corporate
network through one of the following connections:
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ⅷ Wi-Fi
ⅷ Sprint 4G
ⅷ Data Services
ⅷ Virtual Private Networks or VPN
Connecting Using Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi provides wireless Internet access over distances
of up to 300 feet. To use your device’s Wi-Fi, you need
access to a wireless access point or “hotspot.”
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Note: The availability and range of the Wi-Fi signal depends
on a number of factors, including infrastructure and
other objects through which the signal passes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
When your device is connected to a wireless network,
the Wi-Fi icon ( ) appears in the status bar and tells
you the approximate signal strength (number of bands
displayed).
Turning Wi-Fi On and Connecting to a
Wireless Network
1. Press
>
and tap Settings >
Wireless & networks.
If Network notification in Wi-Fi settings is enabled, this
icon ( ) appears in the status bar whenever the
device detects an available wireless network within
range.
2. Select the Wi-Fi check box to turn Wi-Fi on. The
device will scan for available wireless networks.
3. Tap Wi-Fi settings. The network names and security
settings (Open network or Secured with WEP) of
detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi
networks section.
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed secured wireless network, you will not be
prompted to enter the WEP key again, unless you reset
your device to its factory default settings.
4. Tap a Wi-Fi network to connect. If you selected an
open network, you will be automatically connected
to the network. If you selected a network that is
secured with WEP, enter the key, and tap Connect.
Wi-Fi networks are self-discoverable, which means no
additional steps are required for your device to connect
to a Wi-Fi network. It may be necessary to provide a
user name and password for certain closed wireless
networks.
Depending on the network type and its security
settings, you may also need to enter more information
or choose a security certificate.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Wireless Network Status
Connecting to Another Wi-Fi Network
1. Press
>
and tap Settings >
Wireless & networks.
1. On the Wireless controls screen, tap Wi-Fi settings.
Detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi
networks section. To manually scan for available
Wi-Fi networks, on the Wi-Fi settings screen,
2. On the Wireless & networks screen, tap Wi-Fi
settings, and then tap the wireless network that the
device is currently connected to.
press
and tap Scan.
2. Tap another Wi-Fi network to connect to it.
A message box is then displayed showing the Wi-Fi
network name, status, speed, signal strength, and other
details.
Note: If the wireless network you want to connect to is not in
the list of detected networks, scroll down the screen,
and tap Add Wi-Fi network. Enter the wireless
network settings and tap Save.
Adding the Wi-Fi Widget
Add the Wi-Fi widget to the Home screen to make it
faster for you to turn Wi-Fi on or off.
To learn how to add widgets, see “Customizing the
Note: If you want to remove the device’s wireless network
settings, tap Forget on this window. You need to enter
the settings again if you want to connect to this wireless
network.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning Sprint 4G On and Connecting to
the Sprint 4G Network
Connecting Using Sprint 4G
Sprint 4G provides your device with wireless Internet
access over greater distances than Wi-Fi and delivers
data transfer rates of up to 30 Mbps. To connect your
device to Sprint 4G network, you need access to a
Sprint 4G base station.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings >
Wireless & networks.
2. Scroll down the screen and select the 4G check
box to turn Sprint 4G on. The device will
automatically scan for the Sprint 4G network and
will automatically connect to it.
For more information about the availability of Sprint 4G
Web.
When your device is connected to the Sprint 4G
network, the 4G icon ( ) appears in the status bar
and tells you the approximate signal strength (number
of bands displayed). If Network notification in 4G
settings is enabled, this icon ( ) appears in the status
bar whenever the device detects the Sprint 4G network.
Note: The availability and range of the Sprint 4G depends on
a number of factors including your distance to the
Sprint 4G base station, and infrastructure and other
objects through which the signal passes.
Note: The Sprint 4G network is self-discoverable, which
means no additional steps are required for your device
to connect to it.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Sprint 4G Network Status
Getting Started With Data Services
1. Press
>
and tap Settings >
Wireless & networks.
With your Sprint service, you are ready to start enjoying
the advantages of data services. This section will help
you learn the basics of using your data services,
including managing your user name, launching a data
connection, and navigating the Web with your device.
2. Scroll down the screen and tap 4G settings. The
network provider name, signal strength, and IP
address are displayed.
Adding the Sprint 4G Widget
Your User Name
Add the Sprint 4G widget to the Home screen to make
it faster for you to turn it on or off.
When you buy your device and sign up for service,
you’re automatically assigned a user name, which is
typically based on your name and a number, followed
by “@sprintpcs.com.” (For example, the third John
Smith to sign up for Sprint data services might have
[email protected] as his user name.)
To learn how to add widgets, see “Customizing the
When you use Sprint data services, your user name is
submitted to identify you to the Nationwide Sprint
Network. Your user name will be automatically
programmed into your device. You don’t have to enter it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
171
Finding Your User Name
Data Connection Status and Indicators
If you aren’t sure what your user name is, you can
easily find it on your device.
Your device displays the current status of your data
connection through indicators at the top of the screen.
The following symbols are used:
ᮣ
Press
>
and tap Settings > About phone >
Network > Current username.
Your device is connected to the high-speed
Sprint 3G network (EVDO). When the arrows
are white, your device is transferring data (for
example, when you are opening a Web page);
when the arrows are gray, your device is
connected to the network but is not currently
transferring data (for example, when you are
viewing a Web page that is completely open).
In either state, you can receive incoming calls.
Updating Your User Name
If you choose to change your user name and select a
new one online, you must then update the user name
on your device.
ᮣ
Press
>
and tap Settings > System
updates > Update profile. (To cancel, press
before completing the update.)
Launching a Web Connection
Your device is on and is connected to the Sprint
1xRTT data network. When the arrows are white,
your device is transferring data (for example,
when you are opening a Web page) and you
cannot receive calls. When the arrows are gray,
your device is connected to the network but is not
currently transferring data (for example, when you
are viewing a Web page that is completely open),
and you can receive calls.
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Internet.
(Your data connection starts and you see the
SprintWebSM home page.)
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do not see an indicator, your device does not
have a current data connection. To launch a
Connecting to a Virtual Private
Network (VPN)
Turning the Data Connection On or Off
From your device, you can add, set up, and manage
virtual private networks (VPNs) that allow you to
connect and access resources inside a secured local
network, such as your corporate network.
Turning your data connection off can help optimize
your battery life. It can also save money on data
charges. However, when your data connection is
turned off, you may not always receive automatic
updates to your email, social network accounts, and
other synchronized information.
Preparing Your Device for VPN Connection
Depending on the type of VPN you are using at work,
you may be required to enter your login credentials or
install security certificates before you can connect to
your company’s local network. You can get this
information from your network administrator.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings >
Wireless & networks.
2. Select the Mobile network check box to turn on the
data connection; clear the check box to turn off the
data connection.
Also, your device must first establish a Wi-Fi or data
connection before you can initiate a VPN connection.
For information about setting up and using these
connections on your device, see “Launching a Web
Adding the Data Connection Widget
Add the Data connection widget to the Home screen to
make it faster for you to turn the device’s data
connection on or off.
To learn how to add widgets, see “Customizing the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
173
3. Tap VPN settings and set them up according to the
security details you have obtained from your
network administrator.
Setting Up Secure Credential Storage
If your network administrator instructs you to download
and install security certificates, you must first set up the
device’s secure credential storage.
4. When finished, press
, and then tap Save.
The VPN is then added to the VPNs section of the VPN
settings screen.
1. Press
>
, tap Settings > Security, and then
tap Set password.
2. Enter a new password (at least eight characters
without any spaces) for the credential storage,
scroll down and confirm the password, and then
tap OK.
Connecting to a VPN
1. Press
>
and then tap Settings >
Wireless & networks > VPN settings.
2. In the VPNs section, tap the VPN that you want to
connect to.
3. Select the Use secure credentials check box.
You can then download and install the certificates
needed to access your local network. Your network
administrator can tell you how to do this.
3. When prompted, enter your log in credentials, and
then tap Connect. When you are connected, the
VPN connected icon
appears in the
notification area of the title bar.
Adding a VPN Connection
4. Open the Web browser to access resources such
as intranet sites on your corporate network. (For
more information, see “Opening the Browser” on
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Wireless &
networks > VPN settings.
2. Tap Add VPN, and then tap the type of VPN you
want to add.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disconnecting From a VPN
Using the Device’s Web Browser
1. Press and hold the title bar, and then drag down to
open the Notifications panel.
Open the browser to start surfing the Web. The browser
is fully optimized and comes with advanced features
that let you enjoy Internet browsing on your device.
2. Tap the VPN connection to return to the VPN
settings screen, and then tap the VPN connection
to disconnect from it.
Opening the Browser
When your device has disconnected from the VPN, the
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Internet.
VPN disconnected icon
is displayed in the
notification area of the title bar.
The Browser Menu
Although the home page offers a broad and
convenient array of sites and services for you to
browse, not all sites are represented, and certain
functions, such as going directly to specific websites,
are not available. For these and other functions, you will
need to use the browser menu. The browser menu
offers additional options to expand your use of the Web
on your device.
Opening the Browser Menu
The browser menu may be opened any time you have
an active data session, from any page you are viewing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
175
To open the browser menu:
Press while on the browser.
Ⅲ Page info: Lets you display the information about
the website.
ᮣ
Ⅲ Share page: Lets you send the website URL using
Bluetooth, Facebook, Friend Stream, Gmail, Mail,
Messages, or Peep.
Options available under the browser menu include:
ⅷ Back: Returns you to a previously viewed page (after
having tapped Forward).
Ⅲ Downloads: Lets you view applications that you
ⅷ Forward: Returns you to a previously viewed page
(after having tapped Back).
have downloaded from the Web.
Ⅲ History: Keeps a list of links to your most recently
visited sites. To navigate to a site, touch a site.
ⅷ Add bookmark: Allows you to bookmark the current
site.
Ⅲ Settings: Opens the browser settings.
ⅷ Bookmarks: Allows you to access and manage your
bookmarks.
Going to a Website
1. On the browser screen, press
box at the top of the screen.
ⅷ Windows: Allows you to open additional browser
windows.
and tap the URL
ⅷ More
2. Enter the website address using the keyboard. As
you enter the address, matching website
addresses will appear on the screen. Tap an
address to go directly to that website or continue
entering the website address.
Ⅲ Home: Lets you return to your home page.
Ⅲ Find on page: Allows you to find specific text on a
Web page.
Ⅲ Text selection: Allows you to select text to copy,
looking up for information, and share. For more
information, see “Copying Text, Looking Up
3. Tap
on the onscreen keyboard.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Your Home Page
Browsing Full Versions of Web Pages
1. With the browser open, press
More > Settings > Set home page.
and then tap
Some websites display a mobile version of their pages
to phone Web browsers. You can choose to view the
full version of all pages, even for these sites.
2. In the Set home page screen, select the home
page you want to use.
ᮣ
On the browser screen, press
, tap More >
Ⅲ Use default to set the SprintWebSM home page as
Settings, and clear the Mobile view check box.
your home page.
Navigating on a Web Page
Ⅲ Use current to set the current Web page you are
browsing as your home page.
Panning on a Web Page
Ⅲ Set home page to enter the URL of the website you
want to use as your home page.
ᮣ
Slide your finger on the screen in any direction to
navigate and view other areas of the Web page.
Changing the Screen Orientation
The device automatically changes the screen
orientation depending on how you are holding your
device.
Note: The Auto-rotate screen check box in
>
>
Settings > Display needs to be selected for the
screen orientation to automatically change.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zooming In or Out on a Web Page
Opening a New Browser Window
ᮣ
Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in; tap the
screen twice quickly again to zoom out.
Open multiple browser windows to make it easier for
you to switch from one website to another. You can
open up to four browser windows.
– or –
Spread or pinch the screen to zoom in and out.
1. On the browser screen, press
Windows.
and tap
2. Tap
. A new browser window opens and goes
to the home page that is set.
Switching Between Browser Windows
1. On the browser screen, press
Windows.
and tap
2. Select the browser window you want to view by
sliding your finger on the screen from right to left.
Tap to close
the Web page.
Tap to display
the Web page
in full screen.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap the browser window to open it in full-screen
Selecting Links in Web Pages
mode.
Links can be selected as shown below. Links are
enclosed in a colored box when selected.
Finding Text In a Web Page
Link
What to do
1. While viewing a Web page, press
More > Find on page.
and tap
Web page
address
(URLs)
ⅷ Tap the link to open the Web page.
ⅷ Press and hold the link to open a menu
that allows you to open, bookmark, copy
to the clipboard, or share the link using
email.
2. Enter the search item. As you enter characters,
matching characters will be highlighted in green.
Tap the left or right arrow to go to the previous or
next matching item.
Email
address
ⅷ Tap to send an email message to the
email address.
ⅷ Press and hold and tap Copy on the
menu to copy the email address to the
clipboard. You can paste the email
address later when creating a new
contact or sending a new email
message.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
179
The browser also recognizes some phone numbers
and addresses that allow you to call the phone number
or locate the address in Google Maps™. Recognized
phone numbers and addresses are highlighted in
green when you navigate to them.
3. When the Attention dialog box opens, tap OK.
Note: All downloaded applications are saved to the microSD
card. Before you download an application from the
Web, make sure that you have installed a microSD card
on your device. For information on how to install a
microSD card, see “Inserting the microSD Card” on
Link
What to do
Location Tap the address to open Google Maps
address and locate the address.
WARNING: Applications downloaded from the Web can be
from unknown sources. To protect your device
and personal data, download applications only
from trusted sources such as Android Market.
Refer to “Downloading Applications and Games
From Android Market” on page 200 for details.
Phone Tap to open the Phone screen to call the
number phone number.
Tip: Zoom in on the Web page when links are too small for
tapping directly on the screen.
To view your downloads:
ᮣ
On the browser screen, press
More > Downloads.
and tap
Downloading Applications From the Web
Before you can download applications from the Web,
you must first enable downloading from the device
settings.
1. Press
>
and tap Settings > Applications.
2. Select the Unknown sources check box.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To select a larger block of text, you can drag these
markers up or down.
Copying Text, Looking Up Information, and
Sharing
You can select text on a Web page and then:
Ⅲ Copy it.
Ⅲ Look it up on Wikipedia or in Google Dictionary.
Ⅲ Get a translation of the text from Google Translate.
3
2
Ⅲ Share the text in a new email, text, or multimedia
message or in your status update on a social
network.
4
Selecting Text
1. Press and hold on a word.
Tip: To select text in a link, press and hold the link, and then
tap Text selection.
Copying and Pasting Text
2. Drag the start and end markers to highlight the
surrounding text you want to select. You can drag
to increase or decrease the text selection area.
1. After you have selected the text you want to copy,
tap . The selected text is then copied to the
clipboard.
3. Tap an icon to copy, search or translate, or share
the selected text.
2. In a text box (for example while composing a
message), press and hold at the point where you
want to paste the text.
3. Tap Paste.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching or Translating Text
Managing Bookmarks and Previously
1. After you have selected the text you want to search Visited Web Pages
or translate, tap
.
You can store as many bookmarks as you want on
your device. You can also access a convenient History
list of the sites you have visited, or quickly view the
pages that you access most often.
2. Tap one of the following tabs:
Ⅲ Wikipedia
the selected text in Wikipedia.
Look for related information about
Ⅲ Google Translate
to another language.
Translate the selected text
To bookmark a website:
1. While viewing a Web page, press
Add bookmark. The New bookmark screen opens.
, and then tap
Ⅲ Google Dictionary
in the dictionary.
Look up the selected text
2. Edit the bookmark Name if needed, and then tap
Done.
Pasting Text in a New Message or Social Network
Status Update
To open a bookmark:
1. After you have selected the text you want to share,
1. On the browser screen, press
Bookmarks.
and tap
tap
.
2. Select an option to paste the selected text in a new
email, text or multimedia message or in your status
update on a social network such as Twitter.
2. Select the bookmark you want to open by sliding
your finger up or down.
3. On the Bookmarks tab
, navigate to the
bookmark you want to open, and then tap it.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To edit a bookmark:
To view a page that you often visit:
1. On the browser screen, press
Bookmarks.
and tap
and tap Edit.
1. On the browser screen, press
and tap
, navigate to the page
Bookmarks.
2. On the Bookmarks tab
, press
2. On the Most Visited tab
you want to view, and then tap the page.
3. Tap the bookmark you want to edit.
4. Enter your changes and tap Done.
To viewing a previously visited page:
To clear the list of most visited pages:
1. On the browser screen, press
Bookmarks.
and tap
1. On the browser screen, press
Bookmarks.
and tap
2. On the Most Visited tab
tap Clear all.
, press , and then
2. On the History tab
, navigate to the page you
want to view and then tap the page.
To change the view of bookmarks or most visited pages:
On the browser screen, press and tap Bookmarks.
On the Bookmarks tab or the Most visited tab
press , and then tap Thumbnails, List, or Grid to
To clear the list of previously visited pages:
,
1. On the browser screen, press
Bookmarks.
and tap
change the view. For example, if you are in Thumbnails
2. On the History tab
Clear history.
, press
, and then tap
view and you want to view bookmarks in a grid,
press
and tap List, and then press
and tap Grid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
183
corner, and then tap New Account. If the Choose a
mail provider screen is displayed, tap Other
(POP3/IMAP).
Accessing Email Messages
You can send and receive email messages from your
favorite POP3/IMAP email account, or from the
Exchange ActiveSync account that you use at work
right from your device. Mail and Gmail allow you to stay
connected 24 hours a day anywhere on the Nationwide
Sprint Network.
3. Enter the Email address and Password for the email
account and then tap Next.
Important: If the account type you want to set up is not in the
device database, you will be asked to enter more
details. You should get all pertinent information for
the email account such as incoming and
outgoing server settings before you proceed.
Email
Use the Mail application to send and receive email
from your webmail or other accounts, using POP3 or
IMAP. You can also access your Exchange ActiveSync
email and other features on your device.
4. Enter the Account name and Your name and tap
Finish setup.
Adding a POP3/IMAP Email Account
1. Press
and tap
> Mail.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ If this is your first time to add an email account in
Mail, tap Other (POP3/IMAP) on the Choose a mail
provider screen.
Ⅲ If you have already added an email account in
Mail, in your email Inbox, tap
on the upper-left
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding an Exchange ActiveSync Account
Creating Another Email Account
If you synchronize your device with your Exchange
ActiveSync account, you can read, manage, and send
email in the same easy way as with a
POP3/IMAP account. However, you can also access
some powerful Exchange features.
ᮣ
If you are in the Inbox of an email account,
press and then tap More > New account.
Composing and Sending Email
1. Press
and tap
> Mail.
2. On the email account Inbox, press
Compose.
and tap
1. Press
and tap
> Mail.
2. On the Choose a mail provider screen, tap
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
Tip: Tap
on the upper-left corner to switch to a different
email account.
3. Enter the Exchange ActiveSync account details
and then tap Next.
3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:
Note: Your corporate Exchange Server must support auto-
detect for the device to automatically set up the
Exchange ActiveSync account. If your corporate
Exchange Server does not support auto-detect, you will
need to enter your Exchange Server settings after you
tap Next. Ask your Exchange Server administrator for
details.
Ⅲ Enter email addresses directly in the To field. If
you’re sending the email to several recipients,
separate the email addresses with a comma. As
you enter email addresses, any matching
addresses from your contacts list are displayed.
Tap a match to enter the address directly.
Ⅲ Tap the
icon, and then select the email
4. Select the type of information you want to
synchronize and tap Finish setup.
addresses of the contacts to whom you want to
send the email. You can also select contact
groups as recipients, or add contacts from the
company directory if you have set up an
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exchange ActiveSync account on your device.
When you have selected all the message
recipients, tap Done.
other people about. The URL from which the app
can be downloaded will be inserted in your email.
Ⅲ Location: You can attach location information.
Send your current location (requires GPS to be
turned on), a location stored in Footprints, or a
location you pick on a map. (For more information
about GPS, maps, and Footprints, see “GPS
Tip: If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon
copy (Bcc) of the email to other recipients, press
and
tap Show Cc/Bcc.
4. Enter the subject, and then compose your
message.
Ⅲ Document: Attach a PDF file or an Office
document such as a text file or a spreadsheet.
5. To add an attachment, press
, tap Add
attachment, and choose from the following options:
6. Tap Send to send the message immediately, or tap
Save as draft if you want to send it later.
Ⅲ Picture: Select Camera to take a photo and attach
it, or Gallery to attach a photo from your storage
card.
Note: To open a draft email, in the email account Inbox,
press
, and then tap Folders > Drafts.
Ⅲ Video: Select Camcorder to capture a video and
attach it, or Videos to attach a video from your
storage card.
Viewing and Replying to Email
1. Press
and tap
> Mail.
Ⅲ Audio: Select Voice Recorder to make a voice
recording and attach it, or Music & sounds to
attach a music file or voice recording from your
storage card.
2. On the email account Inbox, tap the message you
want to view.
Tip: Tap
on the upper-left corner to switch to a different
email account.
Ⅲ App recommendation: Choose an app you’ve
installed from Android Market that you want to tell
3. Tap Reply or Reply all to reply to the message.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inbox filter tabs:
Managing Your Email Inbox
To view your email inbox:
1. Press
and tap
> Mail.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2. Tap a tab at the bottom of the screen to filter the
inbox.
1. Received: Displays email messages as individual items.
2. Conversations: Displays messages as conversations,
grouped according to the subject line. Tap a subject in
the list to show the email conversation.
Tap to view a
different email
account or add a
new email account.
3. Favorites: Displays messages from contacts in your
VIP group. To add contacts to the VIP group from
this tab, tap Add contact to group, select the
contacts you want to add, and then tap Save. For
more information on contact groups, see “Working
4. Unread: Displays unread messages.
Filter tabs.
See “Inbox filter
tabs” for details.
5. Marked: (Exchange ActiveSync only) Displays all
flagged messages.
6. Meeting invitations: (Exchange ActiveSync only)
Displays meeting invitations which you have not
yet accepted or declined.
7. Attachments: Displays all messages that have
attachments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
187
To refresh an email account:
Using Exchange ActiveSync Email Features
To synchronize Exchange ActiveSync email:
Whatever your automatic synchronization settings are,
you can also synchronize your sent and received email
messages manually at any time.
You can set Exchange ActiveSync to automatically
check for new Exchange ActiveSync email messages.
For more information, see “Synchronizing Exchange
ᮣ
While in the account you want to synchronize,
press and tap Refresh.
To sort email messages:
To flag email messages:
1. On the email account Inbox, press
Sort.
and tap
For an Exchange ActiveSync account, you can flag
email messages to help you keep track of them.
2. Select from the options to sort email messages by
1. Press
and tap
> Mail.
date received, priority, subject, sender, or size.
2. On the email account Inbox, tap the message you
want to view.
To delete an email message:
1. On the email account Inbox, press and hold the
message you want to delete.
Tip: Tap
on the upper-left corner to switch to a different
email account.
2. On the options menu, tap Delete.
3. Tap the white flag ( ) on the upper-right corner of
the screen to mark the message. The flag turns red
To delete multiple email messages:
1. On the email account Inbox, press
Delete.
and tap
(
) when you mark the message.
2. Select the messages you want to delete, and then
tap Delete.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set out of the office status:
To set the priority for an email message:
You can set your Out of Office status and auto-reply
message right from your device.
You can set the priority for an email message you send
with your Exchange ActiveSync account.
1. Press
2. Switch to the Exchange ActiveSync account.
3. Press and then tap More > Out of the office.
and tap
> Mail.
1. While composing the message, press
2. Tap Set priority.
.
3. Select the priority for the message. If you selected
High or Low priority, the priority appears below the
subject line of the message.
4. Tap the field below I am currently, and then select
Out of the office.
Editing Email Account Settings
5. Set the dates and times for the period when you
will be out of the office.
1. Press
2. Switch to the email account you want to edit.
3. Press and tap More > Settings, and choose
from these options:
and tap
> Mail.
6. Enter the auto-reply message.
7. Tap Save.
To send a meeting request:
Ⅲ Account settings: Change the email account
settings such as the name, email address,
password, and description.
1. Press
2. Switch to the Exchange ActiveSync account.
3. Press and then tap More > New meeting
invitation.
4. Enter the meeting details, and then tap Send.
and tap
> Mail.
Ⅲ General settings: Set the font size when reading
email messages, enable, disable or set the
signature, set the account as the default email
account, and set where to save email
attachments.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Send & Receive: Set the maximum email file size
limit for incoming messages and the frequency
with which to check for new messages and how
many to check for. You can also choose to have
your sent email messages Bcc’d to yourself.
Gmail
Gmail is Google’s Web-based email service. Gmail is
configured if you chose to set up a Google account
when you first set up your device. Depending on your
synchronization settings, your device’s Gmail is
automatically synchronized with your Gmail account on
the Web. For more information, see “Synchronizing
Ⅲ Notification settings: Set email notification settings.
Ⅲ Delete account: Tap to delete the email account.
4. Press
to save your changes.
Deleting an Email Account
Tip: You can set up more than one Google account on your
device, and then switch between accounts in Gmail.
1. Press
2. Switch to the email account you want to delete.
3. Press and tap More > Settings > Delete account.
and tap
> Mail.
Creating a new Gmail account
Add a new Gmail account to your device to view Gmail
messages, connect to Google Calendars, and
synchronize Google Contacts.
Adding the Mail Widget
Add the Mail widget to view your POP3/IMAP or
Exchange ActiveSync email messages on the Home
screen.
1. Press
sync.
>
and then tap Settings > Accounts &
2. Tap Add account, and then tap Google.
3. Tap Next, and then tap Create.
To learn how to add widgets, see “Customizing the
4. Enter your First name, Last name, and desired
Username, and then tap Next.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. When prompted, enter and reenter a password.
4. Enter your Gmail username and password, and
then tap Sign in.
6. Create a security question and answer, enter a
secondary email address to help you recover your
password if you ever lose it, and then tap Create.
5. After your device connects with the Google
servers, select the items you would like to sync
with your device and then tap Sync now.
7. Read and accept the Google Terms of Service,
and then tap I agree, Next.
6. Tap Finish setup and your device will synchronize
the selected items.
8. Enter the characters shown, and then click Next.
Viewing Your Gmail inbox
9. After your device connects with the Google
servers, select the items you would like to sync
with your device and then tap Sync now.
The Inbox conversations list is your default Gmail view.
All your received email messages are delivered to your
Inbox.
10. Tap Finish setup and your device will synchronize
the selected items.
Gmail groups each message you send with all the
responses you receive. This conversation list continues
to grow as new replies arrive, so you can always see
your messages in context. A new message or a
change to the subject of a current message will begin
a new conversation.
Signing in to an existing Gmail account
Sign into your existing Gmail account to begin using it
on your device.
1. Press
sync.
>
and then tap Settings > Accounts &
2. Tap Add account, and then tap Google.
3. Tap Next, and then tap Sign in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
1. Press
and tap
> Gmail.
Ⅲ Select messages and conversations: Tap the box
before the email or conversation.
Ⅲ View the Inbox of your other Gmail account:
Press
, tap Accounts, and then tap the account
you want to view.
Ⅲ Refresh the Inbox: Press
Refresh.
, and then tap
Sending a New Message
1. Press
and tap
> Gmail.
and then tap Compose.
2. In the Inbox, press
3. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the
To field. If you are sending the email message to
several recipients, separate the email addresses
with a comma. As you enter email addresses, any
matching addresses from your contacts list are
displayed. Tap a match to enter that address
directly.
2. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ View more email messages: If the Inbox is full,
swipe your finger up the screen to view more
messages and conversations.
Ⅲ Read a new email message: Tap the unread
message or the conversation with an unread
message (just-arrived items display in bold). For
Note: If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind
carbon copy (Bcc) of the email to other recipients,
press
and then tap Add Cc/Bcc.
4. Enter the email subject, and then compose your
email.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. In the Inbox, tap the unread email message or the
conversation with the unread email message to
view it.
5. If you want to attach a picture, press
and then
tap Attach. Locate and then tap the picture you
want to attach.
4. On the email message or conversation, do any of
the following:
6. After composing your message, tap Send.
Note: While composing the message, tap Save as draft or
Ⅲ Scroll through the messages in the conversation
by swiping your finger up or down the screen.
press the
button to save it as a draft. To view your
draft email messages, in the Inbox, press
and then
Ⅲ If you have two or more email messages in the
conversation, tap to expand all message headers
in the conversation.
tap Go to labels > Drafts.
To view your sent messages, in the Inbox, press
and then tap Go to labels > Sent.
Ⅲ Tap the star ( ) to star the message. (See
Messages” on page 194 for more information.)
Reading Your Messages
Depending on your notification settings, the device
plays a ring tone or vibrates when you receive a new
email message. A new email icon ( ) also appears
on the notifications area of the status bar to tell you that
you have a new email. For more information on email
notification settings, refer to “Changing Gmail settings”
later in this chapter.
Ⅲ If the sender is a friend in Google Talk, check the
button ( ) before the star in the message header
to know your friend’s online status.
Ⅲ Tap Archive to remove the conversation from your
Inbox and transfer it to the All mail folder in your
Google Account.
Ⅲ Tap Delete to delete the conversation from your
Inbox.
1. Press and hold the status bar, and then slide down
your finger on the screen to open the Notifications
panel.
2. Tap the new email message.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Do one of the following:
Note: If you’ve archived or deleted a conversation by
accident, tap Undo at the top of the conversations list.
The conversation is returned to your Inbox.
Ⅲ If you selected Reply or Reply to all, enter your
reply message.
Ⅲ If you selected Forward, specify the message
recipients.
To view your archived or deleted messages, in the
Inbox, press
and then tap Go to labels > All Mail (for
archived messages) or Trash (for deleted messages).
5. Tap Send.
Ⅲ Tap
conversation in your Inbox.
Ⅲ Press to see more options.
or
to see the previous or next
Searching and Organizing Your Email Messages
To search for messages:
You can search for messages that contain one or more
words in their contents or in their addresses, subjects,
labels, and so on. When you search for messages, all
of the messages in your Gmail account on the web are
included (except those labeled Trash or Spam), not just
those that you’ve synchronized onto your device.
Replying To or Forwarding an Email Message
1. Press
and tap
> Gmail.
2. In the Inbox, tap the email message or
conversation. If the email message is long, swipe
your finger up the screen.
1. Press
2. In the Inbox, press
3. Enter the word or words to search for.
4. Tap , or tap the Enter key on the onscreen
keyboard.
and tap
> Gmail.
3. Tap Reply, Reply to all, or Forward.
.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A conversation list opens, displaying all of the
conversations with messages that contain the words
you searched for. The words you searched for are
displayed below the status bar. You work with the
conversations in this list just as you would with the
conversations in your Inbox or any other conversation
list.
To unstar a message or conversation, touch its star
again. You can also tap a star in a conversation list to
unstar all messages in that conversation.
To label a conversation:
You can organize conversations by labeling them.
Gmail has several preset labels you can use, and you
can also add your own labels, using Gmail on the Web.
To star an email message or conversation:
1. Press
2. Tap a conversation to view the messages in it.
3. Press and then tap Change labels.
and tap
> Gmail.
You can star an important message or a conversation
so that you can easily find it again. To view just starred
messages or conversations with starred messages, see
“Filtering conversations” in this chapter.
4. Select the labels that you want to assign to the
conversation, and then tap OK.
1. Press
and tap
> Gmail.
1. Do one of the following:
To filter conversations:
Ⅲ In the Inbox, tap the star ( ) to the right of the
conversation subject to star the latest message in
the conversation. Conversations with starred
messages are displayed with a star in your Inbox
and in other conversation lists.
You can choose to display conversations that have the
same label or only those that are starred.
1. Press
2. In the Inbox or in another conversation list,
press , and then tap Go to labels.
and tap
> Gmail.
Ⅲ In the inbox, tap a conversation and then go to
the message that you want to star. Touch the star
3. Tap a label to view a list of conversations bearing
that label.
(
) in the message header.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The conversation list resembles your Inbox, but the
label replaces “Inbox” below the status bar. You work
with labeled conversations lists in the same way as with
your Inbox.
Ⅲ Mute: Press
a conversation, you will not receive any future
messages for that conversation.
, and then tap Mute. If you “mute”
Ⅲ Report as spam: Press
, and then tap Report
To clean up your inbox:
spam. The Gmail webmail service works hard to
prevent spam (unwanted and unsolicited “junk”
mail) from reaching your Inbox. But when spam
makes it through, you can help improve the
service by reporting the conversation as spam.
You can clean up your Inbox by archiving, deleting, or
muting conversations. You can also report a
conversation as spam to stop receiving any future
messages from that sender.
1. Press
and tap
> Gmail.
Changing Gmail Settings
2. In the Inbox, tap the box ( ) before the
conversations you want to work on, and then do
any of the following:
1. Press
and tap
> Gmail.
2. In the Inbox, press
Settings.
and then tap More >
Ⅲ Delete: Tap Delete. If you’ve deleted the
conversation by accident, tap Undo at the top of
the screen to move the conversation back to the
Inbox.
3. Set the following options:
Ⅲ Signature: Enter a signature that automatically
appears at the end of your email messages.
Ⅲ Archive: Tap Archive. If you’ve archived the
conversation by accident, tap Undo at the top of
the screen to move the conversation back to the
Inbox.
Ⅲ Confirm actions: Show a confirmation box when
you archive, delete or send a conversation.
Ⅲ Auto-advance: Select which conversation to
display after you delete or archive a conversation.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Message text size: Adjust the size of text in your
email messages.
Changing Gmail Synchronization Settings
1. Press
and tap
> Gmail.
Ⅲ Batch operations: When selected, this adds a
check box to the left of each conversation so you
can add it to a batch.
2. In the Inbox, press
Settings > Labels.
, and then tap More >
3. To set the number of days to synchronize,
tap Number of days to sync.
Ⅲ Clear search history: Remove the searches you
have performed.
Ⅲ Labels: Set how many days and which Gmail
labels to synchronize. See “Changing Gmail
4. To set synchronization for a particular message
label, tap the label, and then select whether you
want messages bearing that label to sync
according to the default number of days you
selected earlier, sync all, or sync none of them.
Ⅲ Email notifications: Show a notification icon on the
status bar when you receive a new email.
Ⅲ Select ringtone: Choose a notification sound for
new email messages.
Ⅲ Vibrate: Make your device vibrate when you
receive a new email message.
Ⅲ Notify once: When cleared, you are notified every
time you receive a new email message.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Switch chats. If you have more than one chat
going, tap this to switch chat with another friend.
Google Talk
Ⅲ Friends list. Return to the Friends list.
Google Talk is Google’s instant messaging program. It
lets you communicate with other people that also use
Google Talk. If you signed in to your Google Account
when you first set up your device, you are already
signed in to Google Talk.
Ⅲ Add chat. Add another friend to your chat. The
friend you invited and the friend your currently
chatting with receive an invitation to a group chat.
Each one who accepts the invitation joins the
group chat.
Chatting with Friends
Ⅲ End chat. End your current chat.
1. Press
and tap
> Talk.
Ⅲ More. Clear the chat history, insert a smiley or
view your friend’s contact details.
2. Tap a friend in the Friends list.
3. Enter your message in the text box. You can also
Accepting Chat Invitations
insert a smiley by pressing
, and then tapping
When a friend sends you a Google Talk message, you
receive a notification. Their entry in the Friends list turns
white and displays the message.
More > Insert smiley.
4. Tap Send.
5. While chatting, press
and then tap any of these
Do one of the following:
options:
Ⅲ In the Friends list, tap the friend who sent you the
invitation to chat.
Ⅲ Chat off record. Your Google Talk messages are
stored in the Chats folder of your Gmail account.
Tap this option if you don’t want to store your chat
messages.
Ⅲ Open the Notifications panel, and then tap the
chat notification. (See “Notifications Panel” on
page 15.)
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Your Online Status and Picture
Adding and Managing Friends
1. Press
and tap
> Talk.
The Friends list is where you add and manage your
friends in Google Talk. Press
and tap
> Talk.
2. In the Friends list, tap your name to open the Set
Status screen.
In the Friends list, do any of the following:
3. Enter your new status message, or press
to
To invite a friend:
choose a custom status from the list.
1. Press
and tap Add friend.
4. Tap the online status beside your picture, and then
select the status you want on the menu.
2. Enter the Google Talk instant messaging ID or
Gmail address of the friend you want to add.
5. Tap your picture, and then tap Remove to remove
your photo, or Change to select another picture on
the storage card. Note that if you’ve selected a big
picture, you will be asked to crop it first.
3. Tap Send invitation.
To view all friends:
Initially, only those friends that you often chat with — the
most popular — are shown in the Friends list.
6. Tap Done.
Ⅲ To view all your friends, press
tap All friends.
, and then
Your online status, message, and picture appear in
your contact’s Friends lists and in other apps where
your Google Talk status are displayed.
Ⅲ To view only friends that you often chat with,
press , and then tap Most popular.
To make a friend popular:
1. Press
and tap All friends.
2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then
tap Always show friend.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To block a friend:
Downloading Applications and
Games From Android Market
You can block a friend from sending you messages.
When blocked, your friend is removed from the Friends
list and is added to the blocked friends list.
Android Market™ is the place to go to find new apps for
your device. Choose from a wide variety of free and
paid apps ranging from productivity apps to games.
When you find an app you want, you can easily
download and install it on your device with just a few
taps of your finger.
1. Press
and tap All friends.
2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Block
friend.
To unblock a friend:
1. Press
and tap More > Blocked.
To access Android Market, you must first connect to the
Internet using your device’s Wi-Fi, Sprint 4G, or data
connection and sign in to your Google Account.
2. Tap the name of the blocked friend, and then tap OK.
To view all invited friends:
Important: Sprint’s policies often do not apply to third-party
applications. Third-party applications may access
your personal information or require Sprint to
disclose your customer information to the third-
party application provider. To find out how a third-
party application will collect, access, use, or
disclose your personal information, check the
application provider’s policies, which can usually
be found on their website. If you aren’t
ᮣ
Press
and tap More > Invites. Friends who have
not yet accepted your invitation are listed in the
screen.
Changing the settings and signing out
1. Press
and tap
> Talk.
2. In the Friends list, press MENU and then tap:
comfortable with the third-party application’s
policies, don’t use the application.
Ⅲ Settings to change the app and notification
settings.
Ⅲ Sign out to sign out from Google Talk.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding and Installing an Application
Ⅲ Search for an app. Tap
home screen, enter the name or type of app
you’re looking for, and then tap
the search box.
on the Android Market
When you install apps from Android Market and use
them on your device, they may require access to your
personal information (such as your location, contact
data, and more) or access to certain functions or
settings of your device. Download and install only apps
that you trust.
to the right of
1. Press
and tap
> Market.
2. When you open Android Market for the first time,
the Terms of Service window will appear.
Tap Accept to continue.
3. Do any of the following to find an app:
Ⅲ Browse through featured apps. Scroll through the
list of featured apps when you open Android
Market.
Ⅲ Browse apps by categories. First, tap Apps or
Games, and then tap a category. Under a
category, you can filter the apps by Top paid, Top
free or Just in.
4. Tap an app to read a description about the app
and user reviews.
Ⅲ Browse apps recommended by Sprint. First, tap
Sprint, and then scroll through the list.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Tap Install (for free applications) or Buy (for paid
After installing an app, tap
of the screen to return to Android Market home.
You can also press , and then tap Home.
on the upper-left corner
applications).
Note: You need a Google Checkout account to purchase
items on Android Market. See “Creating a Google
Checkout Account” to set up a Google Checkout
account if you do not have one.
6. The subsequent screen notifies you whether the
app will require access to your personal
information or access to certain functions or
settings of your device. If you agree to the
conditions, tap OK to begin downloading and
installing the app.
If you selected a paid application, after tapping OK,
you’re redirected to the Google Checkout screen to
pay for the application before it’s downloaded to
your device.
WARNING: Read it carefully! Be especially cautious with
applications that have access to many functions
or a significant amount of your data. Once you
tap OK on this screen, you are responsible for the
results of using this item on your device.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a Google Checkout Account
You must have a Google Checkout account associated
with your Google Account to purchase items from
Android Market.
Requesting a Refund for a Paid
Application
If you are not satisfied with an application, you can ask
for a refund within 24 hours of the purchase. Your credit
card is not charged and the application is uninstalled
from your device.
Do one of the following:
ᮣ
On your computer, go to http://checkout.google.com
to create a Google Checkout account.
If you change your mind, you can install the application
again, but you can’t request a refund a second time.
– or –
1. Press
and tap
> Market > Downloads.
The first time you use your device to buy an item
from Android Market, you’re prompted to enter your
billing information to set up a Google Checkout
account.
2. Tap the application to uninstall for a refund. The
details screen for the application opens.
3. Tap Uninstall & refund. Your application is
uninstalled and the charge is cancelled.
WARNING: When you’ve used Google Checkout once to
purchase an application from Android Market,
the device remembers your password, so you
don’t need to enter it the next time. For this
reason, you should secure your device to prevent
others from using it without your permission. (For
more information, see “Security Settings” on
4. Choose the reason for removing the application,
and then tap OK.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When prompted, tap OK to remove the application
Opening an Installed Application
on your device.
ᮣ
On the status bar, check if you see the
icon. If
4. Choose the reason for removing the application,
and then tap OK.
you see the icon, open the Notifications panel,
and then tap the app to open it.
– or –
Getting Help
ᮣ
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Market > Downloads. On
If you ever need help or have questions about Android
the Download screen, tap the app to open it.
Market, press
, and then tap Help. The Web browser
will take you to the Android Market Help Web page.
– or –
Press
and then tap
. On the All apps
Peep
screen, locate the app, and then tap it.
Peep™ is a Twitter client that lets you enjoy “tweeting”
on your device. Send out tweets, read and receive
tweets from people, and search for new Twitter users to
follow, all from your device.
Uninstalling an Application
You can uninstall any application that you have
downloaded and installed from Android Market.
Note: You need to be signed in to your Twitter account to use
1. Press
and tap
> Market > Downloads.
Peep.
2. On the Downloads screen, tap the application you
want to uninstall, and then tap Uninstall.
Using Peep
ᮣ
Press
, tap
, and then tap Peep. (You may
need to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Peep opens in the All tweets tab. Slide your finger
on the bottom row to go to the tab you want.
5. Shows all private and direct messages that you
have received or sent out.
6. Shows tweets that were marked as favorites.
7. Press and hold an item to open the options menu
to let you reply, send a direct message, Retweet
(share), add to your favorites, or view your profile.
1
2
7
Sending a Tweet
1. On the All tweets tab, tap the “What’s happening?”
text box.
2. Enter your tweet.
3. Add a picture or location to your tweet:
Ⅲ Tap
to post a picture from Gallery or Camera
to your default photo hosting site and add the link
to the picture in your tweet.
3
4
5
6
1. Tap to enter a tweet to send out.
Ⅲ Tap
to insert your location into the tweet. You
can choose to add a map link, insert your location
name, or insert your position coordinates.
2. Tap to view the Twitter user’s profile. This also
shows you all tweets from this Twitter user.
4. Tap Update.
Note: On the Peep screen, press
3. Shows all the tweets from people you follow and
tweets that you have sent out.
and tap More >
Settings > Services to check or change your photo
4. Shows all tweets that mentions your user name
hosting site, location options, and URL shortening host.
using the “@[your username]” convention.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching for Twitter Users to Follow
Sending a Direct Message
1. While on the Peep screen, press
2. Tap the text box with the words “Search Twitter”
and then enter search criteria. Press again or
tap on the screen.
.
You can only send a direct message to someone who
is following you.
1. On the Peep screen, press
message.
and tap New
3. On the Search result screen, scroll through the list
to look for the twitter user you want to follow, and
then tap it.
2. Tap the To field, and then enter the name. As you
enter characters, the names of the Twitter users
that match the characters you enter will appear.
Tap the name when you see it.
Tip: The search results will also list down tweets that contain
the search word.
3. Enter your message, and then tap Update.
You can also send a direct message when you press
and hold a tweet of the person you want to send the
direct message to, and then tap Send direct message
on the options menu.
4. Press
, and then tap Follow.
To stop following a Twitter user:
1. On the All Tweets tab, tap the name of the Twitter
user you want to stop following.
Setting Peep Options
2. Press
, and then tap Unfollow.
ᮣ
On the All tweets tab, press
More > Settings. You can set these options:
, and then tap
Ⅲ Account settings: Sign out of your Twitter account.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ General settings: Choose whether to show the
screen name or the real name of the people you
follow.
Stocks
Stocks allows you to add, view, and analyze stocks and
stock market movements using updated financial
information.
Ⅲ Send & receive: Set the frequency to check for
new tweets and set the number of tweets to
download.
Opening Stocks
Ⅲ Services: Set your photo hosting site, photo
quality, location options, and URL shortening host.
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Stocks. (You may need
Ⅲ Notification settings: Select when to be notified
and how you want to be notified.
to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
Adding the Twitter Widget
Add the Twitter widget to let you send and follow your
tweets right on the Home screen or an extended
screen.
1
1. Press
and tap
.
2. In the Add to Home options menu, tap
Widget > Twitter.
3
3. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.
4. Drag the widget to a blank space on a screen, and
2
4
then release.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. List of your stock quotes and stock market indices.
Tap an item to view its intraday chart and other
details.
Deleting Stock Quotes and Indexes
1. On the Stocks screen, press
and tap Delete.
2. Select the items you want to delete and tap Delete.
2. Tap to update the stock information.
3. Shows the time the information was last updated.
4. Tap to add a stock quote or stock market index.
Manually Updating Stock Information
ᮣ
On the Stocks screen, press
and tap Update.
Adding a Stock Quote or
Stock Market Index
Changing Update Schedule and
Color Settings
1. On the Stocks screen, tap
2. Enter the stock quote or stock market index on the
text box and tap
.
Note: Downloading stock information automatically may incur
additional data connection fees
.
ᮣ
In the Stocks application, press
and then do the following:
, tap Settings,
3. On the results list, tap the stock quote or stock
market index you want to add.
Ⅲ Update when opened: Update the stock
information every time you open the Stocks app.
Changing the Stock List Order
Ⅲ Scheduled sync: Set automatic downloads of
stock information.
1. On the stocks screen, press
and tap Rearrange.
2. Press and hold at the end of the item you want
to move. When the row is highlighted in green,
drag it to its new position, and then release.
Ⅲ Update schedule: Choose a time interval for
checking updates.
3. Tap Done.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Set color for price raise: Change the color for
displaying stock price increases to either red or
green, depending on what’s being used in your
country.
Weather
Weather lets you view the current weather as well as
weather information for the next four days of the week.
Weather can display weather information for your city
or weather for up to ten cities. If you consented to turn
location service on, you’ll see the weather of your
current location right on the HTC Clock widget of your
Home screen.
Adding the Stocks Widget
1. Press
and tap
.
2. In the Add to Home options menu, tap
Widget > Stocks.
Note: Turn location services on your device so that you’ll be
able to check your current location’s weather on the
HTC Clock widget, Weather application, and the
3. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.
4. Drag the widget to a blank space on the Home
Weather widget. Press
Location, and then select the Use wireless
>
, tap Settings >
screen, and then release.
networks check box.
You can also use the Weather application to check the
current weather and weather forecasts for the next four
days of the week. In addition to your current location’s
weather, this application also displays the weather
forecasts of other cities around the globe.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
209
Opening Weather
Adding a City
1. On the Weather screen, tap
.
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Weather. (You may need
to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
2. Enter the location you want to add on the text field.
As you enter text, the list is filtered to show the
possible locations based on the letters you
entered.
To view the weather
in other cities, drag
your finger upward
or downward on
the screen.
3. Tap the city to select it.
Changing the Order of Cities
1. On the Weather screen, press
Rearrange.
and tap
2. Press and hold
at the end of the item you want
to move. When the row is highlighted in green,
drag it to its new position, and then release.
3. Tap Done.
Deleting a City
1. On the Weather screen, press
and tap Delete.
2. Select the cities you want to delete and tap Delete.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Weather Options
1. On the Weather screen, press
News Feeds
and tap Settings.
Use the News app to subscribe to news feeds that
cover breaking news, sports, top blogs, and more. You
can also get updates based on specific keywords you
want.
2. Select the options you want:
Ⅲ Select the Update automatically check box to
automatically download weather updates after a
period of time.
The News Screen
Ⅲ To set an auto update schedule, tap Update
schedule and choose a schedule.
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> News. (You may need to
scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
Ⅲ Tap Temperature scale to choose whether to
display weather in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
About the Weather Widget
Use the Weather widget to instantly check weather
forecasts of your current location and other cities
without having to open the Weather application.
The Weather widget comes in different looks and
styles. You can add this widget to the Home screen, if
it’s not yet added.
To find out how you can add a widget, see
1
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
211
1. Subscriptions tab: Displays the channels that you
are subscribed to. Tap a channel to show the
stories for that particular channel.
Ⅲ Tap Add Google news feed to subscribe to a
channel from Google News.
4. Select the channels you want to subscribe to.
2. Starred tab: Displays channels and the number of
stories (enclosed in parenthesis) that have been
starred. Tap a channel to show the starred stories
for that channel, then tap a story to read it.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to subscribe to more
channels.
6. Tap Done.
3. Keywords tab: Displays the keywords that you have
created and the number of stories (enclosed in
parenthesis) that match them. Tap a keyword to
display the stories that contain the particular
keyword.
Subscribing to a News Channel by
Entering a URL
1. Press
and tap
> News.
2. On the Subscriptions tab, tap Add feeds > Add from URL.
Subscribing to a News Channel From a
List
3. Enter the complete URL for the RSS feed, and then
tap Done.
1. Press
and then tap
> News.
Setting Update Frequency for Stories
Set News to automatically check for updates for the
channels that you are subscribed to.
2. On the Subscriptions tab, tap Add feeds.
3. Tap one of the categories on the screen to open
the available channels.
1. Press
and tap
> News.
Ⅲ Tap Search more to search the Web for other
channels.
2. While on the Subscriptions tab, press
tap Settings > Check frequency.
, and then
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap the frequency you want.
5. If you want to read the whole story, tap Read full
article. This opens the story in the Web browser.
learn how to navigate on the Web page.
Tip: To manually check for updates, on the Subscriptions tab,
press , and then tap Refresh.
Reading a Story
Starring a Story
Star your favorite stories to make it easy to come back
to them.
1. Press
and tap
> News.
2. On the Subscriptions tab, tap a channel whose
stories you want to read.
1. Press
and tap
> News.
3. Scroll through the list of stories, and then tap a
2. On the Subscriptions tab, tap the channel where
the story you want to star is located.
story to read it.
4. While reading a story, you can tap:
3. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ
to star a story as a favorite.
Ⅲ Locate the story, and then tap
Ⅲ Tap the story you want to star to open it, and then
tap near the top-right corner of the screen.
.
Ⅲ
to share the story via a message (link to the
story only) or email.
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
to go to the Web page where the story is
published.
You can remove the star from an story by tapping
.
and
to go to the previous or next story in
the channel.
Ⅲ
Ⅲ
to go back to the stories list.
to delete the story from the stories list.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Keyword
Find stories the interest you easier by creating
Sprint Hotspot
Sprint Hotspot turns your device into a wireless router
and shares your device’s data connection (1xRTT,
Sprint 3G, or Sprint 4G) with one or more computers or
mobile devices using Wi-Fi. When you open Sprint
Mobile Hotspot, your device creates a secure Wi-Fi
network that you can connect to with your computer
and access the Internet.
keywords. Stories that contain the keyword are grouped
together making it easier to find the story you want.
1. Press
and tap
> News.
2. On the Keywords tab, tap Add keywords.
3. Enter the keyword, and then tap Done.
4. In the Keywords tab, tap a keyword to show the
To use your device as a wireless router, make sure that
your device has an active connection with the Sprint
1xRTT data network, the Sprint 3G network, or the
Sprint 4G network. (For more information, see
stories that contain the keyword in their text.
Adding the News Widget
Read snippets of stories that you have subscribed to
right on the Home screen.
To connect to your device’s Wi-Fi network, you need a
computer with built in Wi-Fi or a Wi-Fi adapter.
1. Press
and tap
> Widget > News.
2. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.
3. Select the channel whose stories you want to read
on the widget.
4. Drag the widget to a blank space on a screen, and
then release.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For a Windows Vista or Windows 7 computer
Setting Up Sprint Hotspot
1. Click Start > Connect To.
1. Press
and then tap
> Sprint Hotspot.
2. In the Connect to a network dialog box, select the
Sprint Hotspot name (or SSID), and then click
Connect.
2. Tap OK on the introduction screen.
3. Enter a new name in the Router name (SSID) text
box, or use the default router name.
Note: Your device’s wireless network may not show up in the
list of available networks immediately. Wait for a
moment and then refresh the list to see the wireless
network.
4. Select a network security method from the Security
list. If you selected WEP, WPA or WPA2, enter a
network key (password) in the Password box.
5. Select the Sprint Mobile Hotspot check box at the
3. Enter the network key (if any) that you used when
setting up Sprint Hotspot and then click Connect.
top of the screen to turn on the wireless router.
When Sprint Hotspot is active and is ready to share its
3G connection, the 3G hotspot icon ( ) appears in the
status bar. When Sprint Mobile Hotspot is active and is
ready to share its Sprint 4G connection, the 4G hotspot
icon ( ) appears in the status bar.
4. Click Close.
For a Windows XP computer
1. Click Start > Connect To > Wireless Network
Connection.
Connecting Your Computer to Sprint
Hotspot
After setting up your device as a wireless router,
connect your computer to your device’s Sprint Hotspot
and access the Internet.
2. In the Choose a Wireless Network dialog box, select
the Sprint Hotspot name (or SSID), and then click
Connect.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Allowed users: Lists the MAC addresses of
computers and devices that are allowed to connect
to and use a Sprint Hotspot on your device.
Note: Your device’s wireless network may not show up in the
list of available networks immediately. Wait for a
moment and then refresh the list to see the wireless
network.
Ⅲ Block users: Lists the MAC addresses of
computers and devices that are not allowed to
connect to and use Sprint Hotspot on your
device. Tap an entry to add a computer or device
that you want to block
3. Enter the network key (if any) that you used when
setting up Sprint Hotspot and then click Connect.
Managing Sprint Hotspot
You can set the number of computers or devices or
allow only specific devices to connect and use Sprint
Hotspot to connect to the Internet.
Turning Off Sprint Hotspot
1. Press
>
and then tap Settings >
Wireless & network.
1. Press
and then tap
> Sprint Hotspot.
2. Clear the Sprint Hotspot check box to turn off
Sprint Hotspot.
2. Tap OK on the introduction screen.
3. Tap User Management, and then set the following
options:
Adding a Sprint Hotspot Widget
Add a Sprint Hotspot widget to the Home screen or an
extension screen to make it faster for you to turn Sprint
Hotspot on or off.
Ⅲ Allowed users only: Select this option if you want
only those devices listed in the Allowed users list
to connect to and use a Sprint Hotspot on your
device.
To learn how to add widgets, see “Customizing the
Ⅲ Max. connections: Tap to set the maximum
number of devices that can connect to and use
Sprint Hotspot on your device.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Your Device as a Modem
Data Services FAQs
Get online with your notebook or desktop computer at
any time, using your device’s data connection. For
information on setting up and using the data
connection, see “Getting Started With Data Services”
How will I know when my device is ready for data service?
will be displayed when you access Settings > About
phone > Network > Current username.
How do I sign in for the first time?
Note: You need to install HTC Sync before you can use your
details.
You are automatically signed in to access data services
when you turn on your device.
How do I know when my device is connected to data
services?
Your device automatically connects when you use data
service or an incoming message arrives. You will also
Make sure that your device has an active connection
with the Sprint 1xRTT data network or the Sprint 3G
network. For more information, see “Getting Started
see the
or
indicator.
1. Connect the device to the computer using the
Can I make calls and use data services at the same time?
Depending on the current configuration of your device,
you may be able to make calls and use data services
at the same time.
provided USB cable.
2. On the Connect to PC screen, select USB tethering,
and then tap Done.
With DDTM off (default):
When you are using your device as a modem, the USB
mass storage feature is disabled, and you will not be
able to use HTC Sync.
ⅷ If you are using the 3G data network, when a voice
call comes in, data transmission is suspended and
will automatically resume when you complete your
voice call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
217
ⅷ If you are on a voice call, you will not be able to
establish a 3G data connection.
connection may become active again quickly.) If your
device receives no data for an extended period of time,
the connection will terminate.
With DDTM on (configured in Call settings):
Can I sign out of data services?
ⅷ You cannot use voice and data services
simultaneously. If you receive a call while data
service is active, your device will forward the call to
voicemail. You can place an outgoing call at any
time, but it will interrupt any in-progress data session.
Your device will not automatically resume an
interrupted data session.
You can sign out without turning off your device;
however, you will not be able to browse the Web or use
other data services (unless you establish a Wi-Fi
connection.) While signed out, you can still place or
receive phone calls, check voicemail, and use other
voice services. You may sign in again at any time. To
sign out, go to Settings > Wireless & networks and clear
the Mobile network check box.
With DDTM off or on:
ⅷ You can make or receive a voice call while you are
connected to the 4G data network. Incoming calls
will not disrupt or suspend your data connection.
When is my data connection active?
Your connection is active when data is being
transferred. Outgoing calls are allowed; incoming calls
go directly to voicemail. When active, the
or
indicator animates on your device’s display screen.
When is my data connection dormant?
If your device receives no data for ten seconds, the
connection goes dormant. When the connection is
dormant, you can make and receive voice calls. (The
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sprint Music lets you preview, purchase, download, and
listen to over a million songs right on your device. You
can even add songs from your own library to round out
your on-the-go playlist.
3C. Entertainment:
TV and Music
TV
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Sprint TV gives you the ability to listen to audio clips
and to view video clips right from your device’s display.
Watch live TV and catch up on episodes of your
favorite shows – anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint
Network.
Sprint TV gives you the ability to listen to audio clips
and to view video clips right from your device’s display.
Watch live TV and catch up on episodes of your
favorite shows – anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint
Network.*
Your Sprint TV Channel Options
The Sprint TV application offers a wide variety of
accessible channels. Subscription options include
comprehensive basic packages as well as a full menu
of “a la carte” channels. Visit www.sprint.com for more
information on channels and pricing.
Note: * Sprint TV coverage not available everywhere. Content
and lineup subject to change. Select channels also
available for casual usage. Visit www.sprint.com/
tvguide for more information.
Note: Available categories and content are subject to change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
Watching TV
Tip: While you are playing a clip, you can slide your finger up
or down on the screen to surf to a different channel. You
will see a small pop-up screen that tells you which
channel you are watching as well as other channels that
you have access to. Slide your finger on the screen to
scroll through the channels. Once you find a channel that
you want to watch or listen to, scroll to it and then tap it (or
simply wait approximately three seconds), and the
channel will begin loading.
1. Press
and tap
> SprintTV.
2. Select TV, Favorites, or More to display channel
options.
3. Tap a channel from the Sprint TV listings or to
select an available category.
Note: The first time you access a channel, the system will
prompt you to purchase access (unless the channel
doesn't have a monthly fee). Select Subscribe to
purchase access, or select Preview to view a preview
of the selected channel.
TV FAQs
1. Will I know if I’m receiving an incoming call while I’m
viewing or listening to a media clip?
4. If applicable, tap the clip to view the program. The
No. All incoming calls will roll into voicemail while
you are playing a clip. If the caller leaves a voicemail,
you will see the voicemail icon on the screen.
clip will automatically load and begin playing.
Note: You must turn off Wi-Fi before you can view Sprint TV. If
you launch Sprint TV and have Wi-Fi enabled, a
message will appear onscreen asking you if you want
to turn off Wi-Fi.
2. How long are the clips? Will I know the estimated
time it will take to play the clip prior to accessing it?
Once you have selected a channel, you will see a
listing of the available clips, with each clip’s length
displayed after the clip’s title. In general, a clip’s
duration will depend on the story or content being
provided, and can be fairly short or as long as a
few minutes.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Can I access a clip wherever I am, as long as I have
my device?
6. If I don’t subscribe to a data plan, will I still be able to
view the multimedia clips?
Yes. For service access charges, please consult
your Sprint service plan or visit www.sprint.com.
As long as you are on the Nationwide Sprint
Network, you will have access to the audio and
video clips.
7. What does it mean when the video pauses and I see
the word “loading” at the bottom of the screen?
This happens when the device is loading the data
necessary to play the clip. It typically occurs when
there is heavy traffic on the network.
Note: Sprint TV service does not work while roaming off of
the Nationwide Sprint Network or where service is
unavailable.
4. Are the videos that I’m viewing “live” videos?
It depends on the content provider. Some of the
channels available through Sprint TV stream live
content. Others provide media on demand with
video and audio clips that are refreshed throughout
the day, but that are not “live.”
8. How can I cancel service if I decide I don’t want it?
To cancel your Sprint TV service, visit
www.sprint.com and sign on to My Sprint with your
account number and password. From this page,
you have the ability to cancel the service or any
channels to which you subscribe.
5. After purchasing access to an Available Channel for a
monthly fee, do I receive any confirmation? That is,
how do I know it has been purchased?
9. If I put on my stereo headset and insert it into the
device’s headset jack, can I turn off the screen while I
am playing an audio (or video) clip without
interrupting the clip?
Yes. When you insert your stereo headset into the
device’s headset jack, the device automatically
goes into “headset mode,” allowing you to turn the
screen off and continue playing the clip.
The next time you access the channel, you bypass
the Preview/Purchase page and go directly to the
available content.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
221
(Likewise, if your device is in “headset mode,” a
phone call will not disconnect when you turn off
the screen.)
Music - MP3 Store
Amazon MP3 lets you preview, purchase, download,
and listen to over a million songs right on your device.
MP3 Store provides you with one-touch access to
digital music from www.amazon.com. Amazon has more
than 6 million DRM-free MP3 tracks you can purchase
and download to your device.
Important: You can download MP3s only by using a
Sprint 4G or Wi-Fi connection. You can browse
and preview songs using a data connection.
10. Can I surf to a different channel while I am playing a
clip?
Yes. While you are playing a clip, you can use the
up and down navigation keys to surf to a different
channel. You will see a small pop-up screen that
tells you which channel you are watching as well
as other channels that you have access to. Use the
navigation keys to scroll through the different
channels. Once you find a channel that you want
to watch, scroll to it and press (or simply wait
approximately three seconds), and the channel will
begin loading.
Accessing the MP3 Store
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> Amazon MP3.
Purchasing and Downloading Music
Now that you’re in the store, you can shop for songs to
purchase and download to your device’s microSD
card.
1. From the Amazon MP3 opening page, select an
option to browse the store:
Ⅲ Bestselling Albums displays the bestselling
albums on Amazon.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Bestselling Songs displays the bestselling songs
on Amazon.
Streaming Music
Ⅲ Browse by Genre lets you search songs or albums
In addition to the Amazon MP3, Sprint offers a variety of
musical options through the Radio category in the
Sprint TV menu, including SIRIUS Music, Music
Choice, VH1, and many others. Choose from rock, pop,
hip-hop, and R&B, and access exclusive video clips,
music industry news, performances, and interviews
with your favorite artists.
by musical genres.
Ⅲ Search gives you the option of searching for
specific songs, albums, or artists. Just use the
keyboard to enter your search criteria in the
“Search Amazon MP3” text box and tap
.
2. Tap the price at the right side of the album or song
to purchase it.
1. Press
and tap
> Sprint TV.
3. Tap Buy. (If there is no microSD card installed or if
there is not enough free memory space on the
card, you will see an alert.)
2. Select Radio to display channel options.
3. Tap a channel from the Sprint TV listings or to
select an available category.
4. Enter your Amazon.com account e-mail address and
Password, and tap Sign-in.
4. Select Preview to see and hear a preview of your
selected channel (if available).
Tip: While viewing a song list, preview the song by tapping
– or –
the song name in the list.
Select Subscribe to purchase a monthly
subscription to your selected channel.
While viewing an album list, tap an album to display the
songs included in the album. You can purchase
individual songs in an album.
Once you have purchased access to a music or radio
channel, you can select from a variety of stations to
listen to your favorite music or get caught up on what’s
new in music.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
223
Opening YouTube
YouTube
ᮣ
Press
and tap
> YouTube. (You may need
YouTube is an online video streaming service that
allows you to view videos that have been uploaded by
YouTube members.
to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
Note: You do not need a YouTube account to browse and
view videos. However, to use all the features of YouTube
(such as viewing “My account”), you must create a
YouTube account from your computer and sign in to
that account from your device.
You must have an active data, Sprint 4G or Wi-Fi
connection to access YouTube.
YouTube presents the videos grouped into categories,
such as Most viewed, Most discussed, Most recent, and
Top rated.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap a search result. The number of search results
appears below the status bar.
Watching Videos
1. On the YouTube screen, select a video to watch
from the available categories. Tap a category to
see the available videos for that category.
4. Scroll through the videos and tap a video to watch
it.
To clear the search history:
2. Tap a video to play it.
1. On the YouTube screen, press
and tap Settings.
Note: The screen automatically switches to landscape
orientation when you play a video.
2. Tap Clear search history and tap OK.
3. While watching a video:
Sharing Videos
You can share a video by sending its link to your
contacts.
Ⅲ Tap the screen to display the playback controls.
When the playback controls are displayed, you
can pause, skip forward or backward, or drag the
slider to the point in the video you want to watch.
1. While viewing videos in a list, press and hold the
video, and then tap Share on the options menu.
Ⅲ Press
to rank, comment on, share, flag as
inappropriate, and interact with the video in other
ways.
– or –
While watching a video, press
and tap Share.
4. Press
list.
to stop playback and return to the videos
2. Select how you want to share the video link.
3. Follow screen instructions to send the video link to
your contacts.
Searching for Videos
1. On the YouTube screen, press
.
2. Enter a search keyword and press
again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
225
Capturing a Video and Sharing it on
YouTube
You need to be signed in to your Google Account to
upload your video to YouTube.
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile
NASCAR Sprint Cup MobileSM keeps all NASCAR related
information in one convenient location on your device
and enables you to personalize the content with your
favorite driver. When you are away from the track, you
can follow races using streaming MRN/PRN race
broadcast coverage and in-car audio. NASCAR Sprint
Cup Mobile delivers real-time, race-day statistics and
telemetry from all 43 NASCAR Sprint Cup Series™
drivers and offers video on demand from
1. On the YouTube screen, tap
2. Tap Camera and then tap
.
to start capturing
video. When you are done capturing, tap
.
3. Follow screen instructions or tap the appropriate
screen buttons to enter a title, description, or tags
for your video, or set the privacy level.
NASCAR.COM, SPEED, and more.
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile provides the following
features:
4. Tap Upload.
Closing YouTube
ⅷ Personalize the program view to track your favorite
driver
ᮣ
While on the YouTube screen, press
or
.
ⅷ Live MRN/PRN race broadcasts
ⅷ Live driver/team audio communications
ⅷ Real-time race-day statistics and telemetry for all 43
NASCAR Sprint Cup Series drivers
ⅷ 24-hour access to breaking NASCAR Sprint Cup
Series news including insight and analysis from
industry experts
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Delivers race and qualifying results including
NASCAR Sprint Cup Series points standings and
season statistics
Using NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile for the
First Time
ⅷ Offers video on demand from NASCAR.COM, SPEED
programming and more
When you open NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile for the
first time, it will prompt you to specify your favorite
NASCAR driver.
Note: While using this program, incoming calls may go
directly to voicemail.
1. Press
and tap
> NASCAR. (You may
need to scroll down the screen to see the icon.)
2. On the welcome screen, tap the Car# or Driver
name box. On the subsequent screen, enter your
favorite NASCAR car number or driver name and
then tap OK. Tap Go to continue.
– or –
Tap Select from a list and then tap a NASCAR
driver.
3. A message is then displayed, confirming whether
to add your favorite NASCAR driver to your My
Drivers list. Tap YES to add.
4. If there are subsequent screens that are displayed,
read the messages on the screens and select your
preferences. Tap OK to proceed to the NASCAR
Home screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
227
1. Driver banner. Shows your favorite NASCAR driver
with key statistics. Tap the banner to view the driver
profile.
The NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile Home
Screen
Whenever you open NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile, the
NASCAR Home screen will be displayed, showing your
favorite NASCAR driver banner with statistics. Swipe
your finger upward to scroll down the screen and
browse through more content.
2. Drawer. Information on the NASCAR Home screen
is organized into several drawers. When a drawer
is open, it shows a down arrow at the right side of
the drawer. Tap to close the drawer. To view
information in another drawer, tap the drawer to
open it.
3. Ticker. Shows breaking news ticker.
Note: The NASCAR Home screen below the driver banner
1
2
looks different on race days and non-race days.
The Menu Bar
Press
to display the Menu Bar and access more
features of the NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile.
Menu Bar
3
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigating the Menu Bar
Icon
Description
1. Drag your finger left or right across the Menu Bar
Sprint Fan Learn about the latest Sprint
to scroll through the available feature.
Zone
promotions, and see the recent
winners in the Sprint All-Star
Sweepstakes.
2. Tap an icon to select it and display the
corresponding information.
Fantasy
View NASCAR Fantasy league-
related articles and videos.
Icon
Description
Home
Returns you to the NASCAR Home
screen.
Alerts &
Personal-
ization
Allows you to:
ⅷ Change your primary favorite driver
ⅷ Add or delete any of the four
secondary favorite drivers
ⅷ Subscribe and unsubscribe to free
Sprint Cup SMS text alerts
ⅷ Set your default in-car audio
My Driver Displays your favorite driver’s profile,
season and race statistics, news
and downloads.
News
Displays current driver and racing
news as well editorial and recent
race photos.
Help
Exit
Displays the NASCAR Sprint Cup
Mobile Help.
Stats &
Includes race results, point
Schedules standings, and season statistics.
The NASCAR season schedule is
included here as well.
When you want to close the
program, select Exit, and then tap
YES.
NASCAR
View live SPEED programming or
on SPEED recorded video.
Audio/
Video
Gives you access to the most recent
NASCAR video and audio clips.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
229
Activating Location Mode
Before using any of the location-based services, you
must turn on your device’s location mode.
3D. GPS Navigation
1. Press
>
, tap Settings > Location, and then
tap Location setting. (You will see the Location
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ disclaimer.)
2. Read the disclaimer, select ON and press
.
Turning on Location Services
Before using Google Maps and Google Latitude, turn
on your device’s location services.
GPS Services
1. Press
>
, tap Settings > Location.
2. Select one or both of the following:
Your device’s built-in GPS capability gives you access
to a number of location-based services, including
TeleNav Navigation, Google Maps, and Footprints.
Ⅲ Use wireless networks: Uses Wi-Fi or your mobile
data connection to find your approximate location.
Ⅲ Use GPS satellites: Finds your exact GPS location.
This requires a clear view of the sky and more
battery power.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Drive To lets you enter an address (by either
speaking it or by entering it on the keypad) or
select from categories such as My Favorites,
Recent Places, or Businesses to search for turn-
by-turn directions.
TeleNav GPS Navigator
TeleNav GPS Navigator™ gives you turn-by-turn
directions onscreen and over speakerphone.
Note: Depending on your service plan, TeleNav GPS
Navigator may require a monthly subscription.
Contact Sprint for information and pricing.
Ⅲ Search provides a categorized list of locations
such as Gas Stations, Grocery Stores, and
Hospitals to help find local businesses and
services.
Registering TeleNav GPS Navigator
Before you can use TeleNav GPS Navigator, your
device and service must be registered.
Ⅲ Maps & Traffic lets you view maps and get traffic
information for your current location or for any
other location (same categories as Drive To).
Ⅲ Share & More provides access to additional
services such as Record Location, Product Tour,
and Preferences.
1. Press
and tap
> TeleNav GPS Navigator.
2. Follow the onscreen instructions to register your
device.
Using TeleNav GPS Navigator
1. Press
and tap
> TeleNav GPS Navigator.
2. Select an option and follow the onscreen
instructions to get directions, view maps, or access
additional services and options.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Around Maps
Google Maps
When you open Google Maps, you can easily find your
location on the map or check out nearby places by
panning and zooming in and out on the map.
About Google Maps
Google Maps lets you track your current location, view
real-time traffic situations, and receive detailed
1. Press
and tap
> Maps.
directions to your destination. It also provides a search
tool where you can locate places of interest or an
address on a map, or view locations at street level.
2. Do any of the following on the map.
To
Do this
Note: You need an active mobile data or Wi-Fi connection to
Show your
location
Press
and then tap My Location.
use Google Maps.
The blue marker ( ) shows your
location on the map and points north
for your reference.
To find your location with Google Maps, you need to
enable location sources. To learn how, see “Turning on
Move around
Zoom in
Swipe your finger to any direction on
the screen to view nearby places on the
map.
The Google Maps application does not cover every
country or city.
ⅷ Place your thumb and index fingers on
top of the area that you want to zoom
in, and then spread your fingers across
the map.
ⅷ You can also tap
, or double-tap the
area on the map that you want to zoom
in.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Search for the place you want to view in Street
details. When you find the place, tap its balloon.
To
Do this
Zoom out
Pinch your thumb and index finger on
the map to zoom out. You can also
tap
3. On the location details screen, tap the Street view
View
ⅷ Press and hold a location on the map.
A balloon opens over the location, with
the address and a thumbnail from
street view (if available).
ⅷ Tap the balloon to see more
information.You can get directions to
the location, check for nearby places
of interest, and more.
button
.
information for
a random
location
Looking at a Location in Street View
Street View mode (available only in selected areas)
provides a street-level view of the location.
1. Press
and tap
> Maps.
2. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ Press and hold a location on the map, and then
tap the balloon that appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
233
4. To navigate in Street View, do any of the following:
Viewing Map Layers
To
Do this
Initially, Google Maps opens with a street map. You can
view additional map layers, such as satlite images,
traffic information, your Google Latitude friends’
locations, and Wikipedia information on locations. You
can also view maps that you and other people have
created in Google Maps on the web. You can view
multiple layers at the same time.
View
ⅷ Swipe your finger on the screen to pan
up or down or to look in other
directions.
surrounding
areas
ⅷ Press
and then tap Compass
mode to turn Compass mode on. Tilt,
pan, or turn your device to view the
area around the location.
Note: Not all locations have information to support all Map
layers or all zoom levels. To learn more about layers,
Step forward or ⅷ Tap the onscreen arrow to move
towards the direction it is pointing.
ⅷ Press and then tap Step forward
or Step backward.
backward
1. Press
2. Press
and tap
> Maps.
Zoom in or out
Tap , or press
, and then tap
, and then tap Layers.
Zoom.
3. Select any of the following:
Ⅲ Traffic: (Available only in selected areas.) Real-
time traffic conditions are displayed over roads as
color-coded lines. Each color represents how fast
the traffic is moving.
5. To return to the street map, press
Go to map.
and then tap
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ Satellite: Google Maps uses the same satellite
data as Google Earth™. Satellite images are not
real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery
available, most of which is approximately one to
three years old.
Searching For a Location
In Google Maps, you can search for a location, such as
an address or a type of business or establishment (for
example, museums).
Ⅲ Terrain: Shows the elevation of the map you’re
viewing. Elevation is limited to natural geographic
features, like mountains and canyons, and does
not apply to buildings.
1. Press
and tap
> Maps.
2. While viewing a map, press
.
3. Enter the place you want to search in the search
box. As you enter the location to look for,
suggested matches from your contacts, the web,
and previously searched items are displayed.
Ⅲ Buzz: See photos and information about places
shared by other people, or post your own.
Ⅲ Latitude: When you have joined Latitude, you can
view your friends’ locations as a layer on the map.
For information, see “Finding your friends with
Google Latitude (available by country)” in this
chapter.
4. Tap to search for the location you entered or tap a
suggested search item.The search results are
displayed as markers on the map.
5. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Clear Map: Clear layers and view only the street
map.
Ⅲ If the first search result ( ) is what you’re looking
for, tap the balloon. Otherwise, tap
to go to
the next search result until you find the location
you’re searching for, and then tap its balloon.
Ⅲ More Layers: Select more layers such as transit
lines or maps that you have created in Google
Maps on the web.
Ⅲ Tap
to show the search results as a list, and
then tap the location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
235
Details about the selected location displays on the
screen.
Clearing the Map
After you’ve search on a map, you can clear away the
various markers drawn on it by pressing
, and then
tapping More > Clear Map.
Searching For a Place of Interest Near You
Use Places to find places of interest near your current
location. Places uses Google Maps to search common
places that you would want to find, such as the nearest
gas station or ATM kiosk.
Before you use Places, you need to enable location
how.
1. Press
and tap
> Places.
2. Tap the place you want to search.
3. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ When one or two places of interest are found, the
search results are displayed as markers on the
map. You can tap the marker, and then tap the
balloon to view more information about the place.
6. Do any of the following:
Ⅲ Tap the onscreen buttons to view the location on
a map, get directions, view the location in Street
View, if available, and more. Scroll down the
screen to view more options.
Ⅲ Swipe left or right across the screen to view the
information for the next or previous search result.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ⅲ When several places are found, the search results
display in a list. Tap a place to show its location
on a map, and then tap its balloon to view more
information about the place.
Getting Directions
Get detailed directions to your destination. Google
Maps can provide directions for travel by foot, public
transportation, or car.
do on the location information screen.
1. Press
and tap
> Places.
2. While viewing a map, press
Directions.
, and then tap
Adding a Place to Search
In Places, you can add other places of interest that you
frequently search for, such as a church or a pizza
restaurant.
3. Use your current location as the starting point, or
enter a location from where to start in the first text
box. Then enter your destination in the second text
box.
1. Press
and tap
> Places.
2. Tap Add.
– or –
Tap
to select an address from your contacts or
3. Enter the place you want to add to Places’ search
items, and then tap Add. The place is added as a
button on the Places’ screen.
a point that you tap on a map.
4. Choose how you want to get to your destination by
tapping the car, public transit, or walk button.
5. Tap Go.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
237
6. If the place you’ve set as your destination has
several locations available, choose which one to
go to.
When you’re finished viewing or following the
directions, press
and then tap More > Clear Map to
reset the map. Your destination is automatically saved
in the Google Maps history.
7. The next screen displays the directions to your
destination in a list.
Google Latitude
Google Latitude™ user location service lets you and
your friends share locations and status messages with
each other. It also lets you send text and email
messages, make phone calls, and get directions to
your friends’ locations.
Your location is not shared automatically. You must join
Latitude, and then invite your friends to view your
location or accept their invitations. Only friends that you
have explicitly invited or accepted can see your
location.
Opening and Joining Latitude
8. Tap Show on map to view the directions on the
map.
1. Press
and tap
> Maps.
2. While viewing a map, press
Join Latitude.
and then tap
9. Tap the arrow buttons on the map to follow the
directions.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After you’ve joined Latitude and closed the application,
you can do either of the following to open it from the
Home screen:
If your friends already use Latitude, they receive an
email request and a notification on Latitude. If they have
not yet joined Latitude, they receive an email request
that tells them to sign in to Latitude with their Google
Account.
ᮣ
Tap
> Latitude.
– or –
Tap
Responding to an Invitation
ᮣ
> Maps, press
, and then tap Latitude.
When you get a sharing request from a friend, you can:
Inviting Friends to Share Their Locations
Ⅲ Accept and share back: You and your friend can
1. From the Home screen, tap > Latitude.
2. Press MENU, and then tap Add friends.
3. Choose how to add friends:
Ⅲ Select from Contacts: Select any number of
friends from your Contacts.
see each other’s locations.
Ⅲ Accept, but hide my location: You can see your
friend’s location, but they can’t see yours.
Ⅲ Don’t accept: No location information is shared
between you and your friend.
Viewing Your Friends’ Locations
You can view your friends’ locations on a map or in a
list.
Ⅲ Add via email address: Enter one or more email
addresses.
4. Tap Add friends.
5. When asked to confirm, tap Yes.
When you open Maps, your friends’ locations are
shown. Each friend is represented by their picture (from
Contacts) with an arrow pointing to their approximate
location. If a friend has chosen to share city-level
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
239
locations, their picture does not have an arrow and
appears in the middle of the city.
Your friend’s
photo
Opens Quick contact and lets you view
your friend’s contact details, send your
friend an email message, and more.
To see a friend’s profile and connect, tap the photo.
Your friend’s name appears in a balloon. Tap the
balloon to open a screen with details about your friend
and many connection options.
Select from the following:
Sharing
options
ⅷ Best available location. Share your
precise location information.
ⅷ Share only city level location. Share
only the city you’re in, not the street-
level location. Your friend can see your
photo icon in the middle of the city
you’re in. To share more precise
location again, tap Best available
location.
When you open Latitude you see a list of your Latitude
friends, with a summary of their last known locations,
status, and so on. Tap a friend in the list to open a
screen with details about the friend and many
connection options.
ⅷ Hide from this friend. Stop sharing
your location with this friend, in a list or
on a map.
Connecting With and Managing Friends
Tap a friend’s contact details balloon in map view or
tap a friend in list view to open your friend’s profile. Tap
any of the following buttons or options on the profile
screen:
Remove the friend from your list and
stop sharing locations with him or her
altogether.
Remove this
friend
Shows your friend’s location on the
map.
Get directions to your friend’s location.
View your friend’s location in Street
View.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing Privacy Settings
Footprints
You have control over how and when you can be found
by your friends. Only the last location sent to Latitude is
stored with your Google Account. If you turn off Latitude
or are hiding, no location is stored.
Footprints™ provides an easy way to record favorite
places and revisit those places. A footprint consists of a
photo you take of a location such as a restaurant or
sightseeing destination stored together with a precise
GPS position and other information about that location
such as the street address and phone number.
1. Press
and tap
> Latitude.
2. Tap your own name, and then tap Edit privacy
settings.
The next time you want to visit the same place, simply
access the footprint. You can then dial the phone
number or view the location in Google Maps.
3. Set the following options to your preferences:
Ⅲ Turn off Latitude: Disable Latitude and stop
sharing your location or status. You can always
join Latitude again.
Creating a Footprint
1. Press
and tap
> Footprints.
Ⅲ Detect your location: Let Latitude detect and
update your location as you move. The update
frequency is determined by several factors, such
as how recently your location has changed.
2. Tap New footprint. If GPS is not on, you are
prompted to turn it on so that your device can use
GPS to find your location.
Ⅲ Set your location: Choose from several options to
manually select your location.
Note: Use GPS satellites must be selected in Settings >
Location so that your device can determine your GPS
location. You will be asked to turn GPS on if the option
is turned off.
Ⅲ Hide your location: Hide your location from all your
friends.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
241
3. Point the camera at the scene you want to show
the location. Footprints starts to use GPS to search
for your position.
Revisiting a Footprint
1. Press
and tap
> Footprints.
2. At the bottom of the screen, slide your finger to
Tip: To change brightness and white balance settings before
you take a photo, press
, tap Brightness or White
select the Footprint category.
Balance, and then choose a setting.
3. Tap the Footprint you want to revisit.
4. Tap
to capture the photo.
Note: If your GPS position has not been found yet, you are
asked whether to find the position on Google Maps,
continue the GPS search, or stop the GPS search.
You may be asked if you want Footprints to
automatically determine the address for the location.
Tap to open
the URL in the
browser.
5. Tap Done.
Note: Before pressing Done, you can press
, and then tap
Edit to change the name, category, or address of the
Footprint, enter the phone and website, and add a
voice memo to the Footprint.
Tap to show the
addressin Google
Maps.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exported footprints are saved as .kmz files in the
Footprints_Data folder on your storage card. If you
exported multiple footprints at one time, they are saved
together in one .kmz file.
Editing or Deleting a Footprint
On a category screen, press and hold the Footprint you
want to edit or delete, and then tap Edit or Delete on
the options menu.
Importing Footprints
Exporting your Footprints
You can restore footprints you previously backed up to
the storage card. You can also import .kmz files that
you saved in other applications, or use a photo as a
footprint.
You can back up footprints by exporting them to a
storage card. You can also open exported footprints
files in other applications such as Google Earth on your
PC. To transfer files from your storage card to your
computer, see “Viewing History” on page 59.
1. Press
2. Press
and tap
> Footprints
and tap Import.
ᮣ
Press
any of the following:
Ⅲ To export all your footprints, on the All footprints
tab , press and tap Export.
and tap
> Footprints, and then do
3. Do one of the following:
Ⅲ To import a photo, tap Picture, navigate to the
photo you want to import, and then tap the photo.
You can then add Footprints information such as
location and category.
Ⅲ To export all the footprints from a particular
category, while viewing that category, press
and tap Export.
Ⅲ To import saved footprints or another .kmz file
from the storage card, tap Footprints data, and
then tap the file you want to import. If a footprint
on the device is the same as one you want to
import, you are asked whether you want to
overwrite it.
Ⅲ To export a single footprint, open the footprint,
press
and tap Export.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
243
Adding the Footprints Widget
Add the Footprints widget to view and access your
footprints on the Home screen.
To learn how to add the Footprint widget, see
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This User Guide contains important operational and
safety information that will help you safely use your
device. Failure to read and follow the information
provided in this guide may result in serious bodily
injury, death, or property damage.
4A. Important Safety
Information
ࡗ Important Health Information and
Safety Precautions
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ When using this product, the safety precautions below
must be taken to avoid possible legal liabilities and
damages.
Retain and follow all product safety and operating
instructions. Observe all warnings in the operating
instructions on the product.
ࡗ ࡗ To reduce the risk of bodily injury, electric shock, fire,
and damage to the equipment, observe the following
precautions.
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ 246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical Safety
Safety Precautions for Power Supply Unit
ⅷ Use the correct external power source
This product is intended for use when supplied with
power from the designated battery or power supply
unit. Other usage may be dangerous and will invalidate
any approval given to this product.
A product should be operated only from the type
of power source indicated on the electrical
ratings label. If you are not sure of the type of
power source required, consult your authorized
service provider or local power company. For a
product that operates from battery power or
other sources, refer to the operating instructions
that are included with the product.
This product should be operated only with the
following designated power supply unit(s).
AC Adapter HTC, Model TC U250
Safety Precautions for Proper Grounding
Installation
CAUTION: Connecting to an improperly grounded
equipment can result in an electric shock to your
device.
This product is equipped with a USB cable for
connecting with desktop or notebook computer. Be
sure your computer is properly grounded (earthed)
before connecting this product to the computer. The
power supply cord of a desktop or notebook computer
has an equipment-grounding conductor and a
grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an
appropriate outlet which is properly installed and
grounded in accordance with all local codes and
ordinances.
ⅷ Handle battery packs carefully
This product contains a Lithium-ion polymer or
Lithium-ion battery. There is a risk of fire and
burns if the battery pack is handled improperly.
Do not attempt to open or service the battery
pack. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture,
short external contacts or circuits, dispose of in
fire or water, or expose a battery pack to
temperatures higher than 140°F (60°C).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
247
Take Extra Precautions
ⅷ Keep the battery or device dry and away from water
or any liquid as it may cause a short circuit.
WARNING: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. To reduce risk of fire or burns, do not
disassemble, crush, puncture, short external
contacts, expose to temperatures above 140°F
(60°C), or dispose of in fire or water. Replace only
with specified batteries. Recycle or dispose of
used batteries according to the local regulations
or reference guide supplied with your product.
ⅷ Keep metal objects away so they don’t come in
contact with the battery or its connectors as it may
lead to short circuit during operation.
ⅷ The device should only be connected to products
that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the
USB-IF compliance program.
ⅷ Do not use a battery that appears damaged,
deformed, or discolored, or the one that has any rust
on its casing, overheats, or emits a foul odor.
Note: This product should be operated only with the following
designated Battery Pack(s).
ⅷ Always keep the battery out of the reach of babies
and small children, to avoid swallowing of the battery.
Consult the doctor immediately if the battery is
swallowed.
HTC, Model RHOD160.
ⅷ Only use the battery with a charging system that has
been qualified with the system per this standard,
IEEE-Std-1725-2006. Use of an unqualified battery or
charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage
or other hazard.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Replace the battery only with another battery that has
been qualified with the system per this standard,
IEEE-Std-1725-2006. Use of an unqualified battery
may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage or other
hazard.
Safety Precautions for Direct Sunlight
Keep this product away from excessive moisture and
extreme temperatures. Do not leave the product or its
battery inside a vehicle or in places where the
temperature may exceed 60°C (140°F), such as on a
car dashboard, window sill, or behind a glass that is
exposed to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet light for
extended periods of time. This may damage the
product, overheat the battery, or pose a risk to the
vehicle.
ⅷ Avoid dropping the device or battery. If the device or
battery is dropped, especially on a hard surface, and
the user suspects damage, take it to a service center
for inspection.
ⅷ If the battery leaks:
Ⅲ Do not allow the leaking fluid to come in contact
with skin or clothing. If already in contact, flush the Prevention of Hearing Loss
affected area immediately with clean water and
seek medical advice.
CAUTION: Permanent hearing loss may occur if
earphones or headphones are used at high volume for
prolonged periods of time.
Ⅲ Do not allow the leaking fluid to come in contact
with eyes. If already in contact, DO NOT rub; rinse
with clean water immediately and seek medical
advice.
Safety in Aircraft
Due to the possible interference caused by this product
to an aircraft’s navigation system and its
communications network, using this device’s phone
function on board an airplane is against the law in
most countries. If you want to use this device when on
Ⅲ Take extra precautions to keep a leaking battery
away from fire as there is a danger of ignition or
explosion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
249
board an aircraft, remember to turn off your phone by
switching to airplane mode.
restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel
depots, chemical plants, or where blasting operations
are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked.
These include fueling areas, below deck on boats, fuel
or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas
where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as
grain, dust, or metal powders.
Environmental Restrictions
Do not use this product in gas stations, fuel depots,
chemical plants or where blasting operations are in
progress, or in potentially explosive atmospheres such
as fuelling areas, fuel storehouses, below deck on
boats, chemical plants, fuel or chemical transfer or
storage facilities, and areas where the air contains
chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal
powders. Please be aware that sparks in such areas
could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily
injury or even death.
Road Safety
Full attention must be given to driving at all times in
order to reduce the risk of an accident. Using a phone
while driving (even with a hands-free device) causes
distraction and can lead to an accident. You must
comply with local laws and regulations restricting the
use of wireless devices while driving.
Explosive Atmospheres
When in any area with a potentially explosive
Safety Precautions for RF Exposure
ⅷ Avoid using your phone near metal structures (for
example, the steel frame of a building).
atmosphere or where flammable materials exist, the
product should be turned off and the user should obey
all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could
cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or
even death. Users are advised not to use the
equipment at refueling points such as service or gas
stations, and are reminded of the need to observe
ⅷ Avoid using your phone near strong electromagnetic
sources, such as microwave ovens, sound speakers,
TV and radio.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Use only original manufacturer-approved
accessories, or accessories that do not contain any
metal.
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some
hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may
want to consult your service provider, or call the
customer service line to discuss alternatives.
ⅷ Use of non-original manufacturer-approved
accessories may violate your local RF exposure
guidelines and should be avoided.
Nonionizing Radiation
Your device has an internal antenna. This product
should be operated in its normal-use position to ensure
the radiative performance and safety of the
interference. As with other mobile radio transmitting
equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory
operation of the equipment and for the safety of
personnel, it is recommended that no part of the
human body be allowed to come too close to the
antenna during operation of the equipment.
Interference with Medical Equipment
Functions
This product may cause medical equipment to
malfunction. The use of this device is forbidden in most
hospitals and medical clinics.
If you use any other personal medical device, consult
the manufacturer of your device to determine if they are
adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your
physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this
information.
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Use of
unauthorized or modified antennas may impair call
quality and damage the phone, causing loss of
performance and SAR levels exceeding the
recommended limits as well as result in non-
compliance with local regulatory requirements in your
country.
Turn your phone OFF in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF
energy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
251
To assure optimal phone performance and ensure
human exposure to RF energy is within the guidelines
set forth in the relevant standards, always use your
device only in its normal-use position. Contact with the
antenna area may impair call quality and cause your
device to operate at a higher power level than needed.
Avoiding contact with the antenna area when the
phone is IN USE optimizes the antenna performance
and the battery life.
Antenna
location
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical Safety
ⅷ Accessories
General Precautions
You alone are responsible for how you use your device
and any consequences of its use. You must always
switch off your phone wherever the use of a phone is
prohibited. Use of your phone is subject to safety
measures designed to protect users and their
environment.
Ⅲ Use only approved accessories.
Ⅲ Do not connect with incompatible products or
accessories.
Ⅲ Take care not to touch or allow metal objects,
such as coins or key rings, to contact or short-
circuit the battery terminals.
ⅷ Avoid applying excessive pressure to the device.
Do not apply excessive pressure on the screen
and the device to prevent damaging them and
remove the device from your pants’ pocket
before sitting down. It is also recommended that
you store the device in a protective case and
only use the device stylus or your finger when
interacting with the touchscreen. Cracked
display screens due to improper handling are
not covered by the warranty.
ⅷ Connection to a car
Seek professional advice when connecting a
phone interface to the vehicle electrical system.
ⅷ Faulty and damaged products
Ⅲ Do not attempt to disassemble the device or its
accessories.
Ⅲ Only qualified personnel should service or repair
the device or its accessories.
ⅷ Device getting warm after prolonged use.
When using your device for prolonged periods
of time, such as when you’re talking on the
phone, charging the battery or browsing the
Web, the device may become warm. In most
cases, this condition is normal and therefore
should not be interpreted as a problem with the
device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
253
ⅷ Heed service markings.
Ⅲ Do not expose your phone or its accessories to
extreme temperatures, minimum -4°F (-20°C) and
maximum 122°F (50°C).
Except as explained elsewhere in the Operating
or Service documentation, do not service any
product yourself. Service needed on
Ⅲ Please check local regulations for disposal of
electronic products.
components inside the device should be done
by an authorized service technician or provider.
Ⅲ Do not carry your phone in your back pocket as it
could break when you sit down.
ⅷ Protect your device.
Ⅲ Always treat your device and its accessories with
care and keep them in a clean and dust-free
place.
ⅷ Send the product for service.
Unplug the product from the electrical outlet and
refer servicing to an authorized service
technician or provider under the following
conditions:
Ⅲ Liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen
into the product.
Ⅲ Do not expose your device or its accessories to
open flames or lit tobacco products.
Ⅲ Do not expose your device or its accessories to
liquid, moisture or high humidity.
Ⅲ Do not drop, throw or try to bend your device or
its accessories.
Ⅲ The product has been exposed to rain or water.
Ⅲ The product has been dropped or damaged.
Ⅲ There are noticeable signs of overheating.
Ⅲ Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or
aerosols to clean the device or its accessories.
Ⅲ The product does not operate normally when you
follow the operating instructions.
Ⅲ Do not paint your device or its accessories.
Ⅲ Do not attempt to disassemble your device or its
accessories. Only authorized personnel may do
so.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Avoid operating the product in hot areas.
ⅷ Avoid placing device near air bags.
The product should be placed away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves,
or other products (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
Do not place a phone in the area over an air
bag or in the air bag deployment area. Store the
phone safely before driving your vehicle.
ⅷ Use only manufacturer-approved mounting
accessories.
ⅷ Avoid operating the product in wet areas.
Do not use the product on an unstable table,
cart, stand, tripod, or bracket. Any mounting of
the product should follow the manufacturer’s
instructions, and should use a mounting
Never use the product in a wet location.
ⅷ Avoid using your device after a dramatic change in
temperature.
When you move your device between
accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
environments with very different temperature
and/or humidity ranges, condensation may form
on or within the device. To avoid damaging the
device, allow sufficient time for the moisture to
evaporate before using the device.
ⅷ Avoid unstable mounting.
Do not place the product with an unstable base.
ⅷ Use only manufacturer-approved equipment.
This product should be used only with personal
computers and options identified as suitable for
use with your equipment.
NOTICE: When taking the device from low-
temperature conditions into a warmer
environment or from high-temperature
conditions into a cooler environment, allow the
device to acclimate to room temperature before
turning on power.
ⅷ Adjust the volume before using headphones.
Turn down the volume before using
headphones or other audio devices.
ⅷ Clean the product.
ⅷ Avoid pushing objects into product.
Unplug the product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol
cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning, but
NEVER use water to clean the LCD screen.
Never push objects of any kind into cabinet slots
or other openings in the product. Slots and
openings are provided for ventilation. These
openings must not be blocked or covered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
255
ⅷ Keep the product out of reach of small children.
ⅷ Product produces loud noise.
Do not leave your phone and its accessories
within the reach of small children or allow them
to play with it. They could hurt themselves or
others, or could accidentally damage the phone.
Your phone contains small parts with sharp
edges that may cause an injury or which could
become detached and create a choking hazard.
This phone is capable of producing loud noises
which may damage your hearing.
ⅷ Using the product during emergencies.
This phone, like any wireless phone, operates
using radio signals, which cannot guarantee
connection in all conditions. Therefore, you must
never rely solely on any wireless phone for
emergency communications.
ⅷ Avoid repetitive motion injuries.
To minimise the risk of RSI, when texting or
playing games with your phone:
Ⅲ Do not grip the phone too tightly.
Ⅲ Press the buttons lightly.
Additional Safety Information
Do Not Use the PC Functions of Your Device
While Driving or Walking
Ⅲ Make use of the special features in the handset
which minimise the number of buttons which
have to be pressed, such as message templates
and predictive text.
Never use the personal computer functions of your
device while driving an automobile or any other
moving vehicle. Always pull out of traffic and come to a
stop in a legally permissible and safe location before
using your device. Failure to do so could result in
serious bodily injury in a traffic accident.
Ⅲ Take lots of breaks to stretch and relax.
ⅷ Be attentive when operating machinery.
Full attention must be given to operating the
machinery in order to reduce the risk of an
accident.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving:
Using The Phone While Driving Is Extremely
Dangerous
ⅷ Never place your device on the passenger seat or
anyplace else in the car where it can become a
projectile during a collision or stop.
Talking on or using your device while driving is
extremely dangerous and is illegal in some states.
Remember, safety comes first. Check the laws and
regulations on the use of phones in the areas where
you drive. Always obey them.
ⅷ An air bag inflates with great force. DO NOT place
objects, including either installed or portable wireless
equipment, in the area over the air bag or in the air
bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless
equipment is improperly installed and the air bag
inflates, serious injury could result.
If you must use the phone function while driving,
please:
ⅷ Give full attention to driving. Driving safely is your first
responsibility.
Never store or transport flammable liquids, gases or
explosive materials in the same compartment of your
automobile as the device or any of its accessories, as
possible sparking in the device could cause ignition or
explosion.
ⅷ Use hands-free operation or one-touch, speed
dialing, and auto answer modes.
ⅷ Pull off the road and park before making or
answering a call.
Never use your device while walking. Usage while
walking could result in bodily injury caused by
inattention to automobile traffic or other pedestrian
hazards.
WARNING: Failure to follow these instructions could lead to
serious personal injury and possible property
damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
257
Electronic Devices in Vehicles
When Using Your Device Near Other
Electronic Devices
Your wireless handheld portable device is a low power
radio transmitter and receiver. When it is ON, it receives
and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
RF signals may affect improperly installed or
inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor
vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its
representative regarding your vehicle. You should also
consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has
been added to your vehicle.
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from RF
energy. However, certain electronic equipment may not
be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless
device; therefore, use of your device must be restricted
in certain situations.
Posted Facilities
Turn your device OFF where posted notices so require.
Turn Off Your Device Before Flying
In addition, the computer portion of your device
produces low levels of RF energy due to the generation
of digital timing pulses by its clock oscillator circuits.
Your device has been equipped with internal shielding
to minimize stray emissions of RF energy. However, use
of the computer functions of your device must be
restricted in certain situations.
Aircraft
FCC regulations prohibit using the transmitting and
phone functions of your device while in the air. In
addition, most airline regulations prohibit the on-board
use of portable PCs (and all other portable electronic
devices that could potentially emit stray RF energy),
particularly during take-offs and landings, to prevent
any possible interference with the reception of signals
by airborne electronic navigational devices.
Hearing Aids
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some
hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may
want to consult your service provider, or call the
customer service line to discuss alternatives.
Turn your device OFF before boarding an aircraft.
Always request and obtain prior consent and approval
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
of an authorized airline representative before using
your device aboard an aircraft. Always follow the
instructions of the airline representative whenever using
your device aboard an aircraft, to prevent any possible
interference with airborne electronic equipment.
areas where the air contains chemicals or articles, such
as grain, dust, or metal powders; and any other area
where you would normally be advised to turn off your
vehicle’s engine.
General Safety and Other Precautions
Turn Off Your Device in Dangerous Areas
Your device is a high quality piece of equipment.
Before operating, read all instructions and cautionary
markings on the product, battery and AC phone
charger.
Blasting Areas
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your
device OFF when in a “blasting area” or in areas
posted “Turn off two-way radio.” Obey all signs and
instructions.
Failure to follow the directions below could result in
serious bodily injury or property damage due to battery
liquid leakage, fire or rupture.
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres
DO NOT use or store this equipment in a place where it
will be exposed to high temperatures, such as near an
open flame or heat-emitting equipment.
Turn your device OFF when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs
and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an
explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death.
DO NOT drop your device or subject it to severe shock.
When not using, lay down the unit to avoid possible
damage due to instability.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often,
but not always, clearly marked. They include fueling
areas such as gas stations; below deck on boats; fuel
or chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using
liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane);
DO NOT expose this equipment to rain or spilled
beverages.
DO NOT use unauthorized accessories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
259
DO NOT disassemble the device or its accessories. If
service or repair is required, return unit to an authorized
Sprint service center. If the unit is disassembled, the
risk of electric shock or fire may result.
Do not use the device with a damaged antenna. If a
damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin, a
minor burn may result. Please contact your local dealer
for replacement antenna.
Never allow metallic objects, such as staples and
paper clips, to get into the inside of your device.
Battery Safety
Your device uses a removable and rechargeable
lithium ion battery. Please contact customer service for
assistance should you need a replacement battery.
Never touch the liquid that might leak from a broken
liquid crystal display. Contact with this liquid could
cause a skin rash. If the crystal display liquid should
come into contact with the skin or clothing, wash it
immediately with clean water.
DOs
ⅷ Only use the battery and charger approved by the
manufacturer.
In the event that the device emits an unusual odor or
sound or generates smoke, immediately disconnect
the AC phone charger from the power outlet, and then
detach the battery.
ⅷ Only use the battery for its original purpose.
ⅷ Try to keep batteries at a temperature between 41°F
(5°C) and 95°F (35°C).
Antenna Safety
ⅷ If the battery is stored in temperatures above or
below the recommended range, give it time to warm
up or cool down before using.
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement
antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or
attachments could impair call quality, damage your
device, or result in violation of FCC regulations. Please
contact your local dealer for replacement antenna.
ⅷ Completely drain the battery before recharging. It
may take one to four days to completely drain.
ⅷ Store the discharged battery in a cool, dark, and dry
place.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Purchase a new battery when its operating time
gradually decreases after fully charging.
Never touch any fluid that might leak from the built-in
battery. Such liquid when in contact with the eyes or
skin, could cause injury to the skin or eyes. Should the
liquid come into contact with the eyes, irrigate the eyes
thoroughly with clean water and immediately seek
medical attention. In the event the liquid comes into
contact with the skin or clothing, wash it away
immediately with clean water.
ⅷ Properly dispose of the battery according to local
regulations.
DON’Ts
ⅷ Don’t attempt to disassemble the battery – it is a
sealed unit with no serviceable parts.
ⅷ Don’t expose the battery terminals to any other metal
object (e.g., by carrying it in your pocket or purse
with other metallic objects such as coins, clips and
pens). This can short circuit and critically damage
the battery.
AC Phone Charger
Use the Correct External Power Source
A product should be operated only from the type of
power source indicated on the electrical ratings label. If
you are not sure of the type of power source required,
consult your authorized service provider or local power
company. For a product that operates from battery
power or other sources, refer to the operating
ⅷ Don’t leave the battery in hot or cold temps.
Otherwise, it could significantly reduce the capacity
and lifetime of the battery.
ⅷ Don’t dispose of the battery by burning.
instructions that are included with the product.
Lithium ion batteries are recyclable. When you replace
the removable battery, please request the repair center
to recycle the battery in accordance with RBRC
standards. When disposing of the battery by yourself,
please call RBRC at (800) 822-8837 for proper
disposal tips.
The AC phone charger designed by Sprint for this unit
requires the use of a standard 120 V AC power source
for device operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
261
Never attempt to disassemble or repair an AC phone
charger. Never use an AC phone charger if it has a
damaged or worn power cord or plug. Always contact
a Sprint authorized service center, if repair or
replacement is required.
cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Always disconnect the travel charger or desktop
charger from the power source when it is not in use.
Never alter the AC cord or plug on an AC phone
charger. If the plug will not fit into the available outlet,
have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
Regulatory Agency Identifications
For regulatory identification purposes, your product is
Never allow any liquids or water to spill on an AC
phone charger when it is connected to an AC power
source.
assigned a model number of PG06100.
To ensure continued reliable and safe operation of your
device, use only the accessories listed below with your
PG06100.
Always use the authorized Sprint AC phone charger to
avoid any risk of bodily injury or damage to your
cellular phone or battery.
The Battery Pack has been assigned a model number
of RHOD160. Operating temperature range: 32°F to
104°F (0°C to 40°C)
Note: This product is intended for use with a certified Class 2
Limited Power Source, rated 5 Volts DC, maximum 1
Amp power supply unit.
Never attempt to connect or disconnect the AC phone
charger with wet hands. Always unplug the AC phone
charger from the power source before attempting any
cleaning. Always use a soft cloth dampened with water
to clean the equipment, after it has been unplugged.
Handling the cord on this product or cords associated
with accessories sold with this product, will expose you
to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Federal Communication
Commission Interference
Statement
ⅷ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or
television technician for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate
this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one of the following measures:
Important Note
Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End
users must follow the specific operating instructions for
satisfying RF exposure compliance. To maintain
compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance
ⅷ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
ⅷ Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
263
requirements, please follow operation instruction as
documented in this manual.
may be compatible with their hearing devices. Not all
phones have been rated. Phones that are rated have
the rating on their box or a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary
depending on the user’s hearing device and hearing
loss. If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to
interference, you may not be able to use a rated phone
successfully. Trying out the phone with your hearing
device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal
needs.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter,
except the transmitters built-in with the device.
FCC Hearing-Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-
309 modified the exception of wireless phones under
the Hearing Aid Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to
require digital wireless phones be compatible with
hearing-aids. The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure
reasonable access to telecommunications services for
persons with hearing disabilities. While some wireless
phones are used near some hearing devices (hearing
aids and cochlear implants), users may detect a
buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some hearing
devices are more immune than others to this
M-Ratings: Phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference
to hearing devices than phones that are not rated. M4 is
the better/higher of the two ratings. Your PG06100 is
rated M4.
T-Ratings: Phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to be more usable with a
hearing aid’s telecoil than phones that are not rated. T4
is the better/higher of the two ratings. Your PG06100 is
rated T3.
interference noise, and phones also vary in the amount
of interference they generate. The wireless telephone
industry has developed a rating system for wireless
phones, to assist hearing device users find phones that
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please power off the Bluetooth function while using
hearing aid devices with your PG06100.
This methodology applies equally for T ratings. The M
mark is intended to be synonymous with the U mark.
The T mark is intended to be synonymous with the UT
mark. The M and T marks are recommended by the
Alliance for Telecommunications Industries Solutions
(ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section
20.19 of the FCC Rules. The HAC rating and
measurement procedure are described in the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19
standard.
Hearing devices may
also be rated. Your
hearing device
manufacturer or
hearing health
professional may help
you find this rating.
Higher ratings mean
that the hearing device
is relatively immune to
interference noise.
For information about hearing aids and digital
wireless phones
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility and Volume
Control:
The hearing aid and wireless phone rating values are
then added together. A sum of 5 is considered
http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/dro/hearing.html
acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6 is considered
for better use. A sum of 8 is considered for best use. In
the above example, if a hearing aid meets the M2 level
rating and the wireless phone meets the M3 level
rating, the sum of the two values equal M5. This should
provide the hearing aid user with “normal usage” while
using their hearing aid with the particular wireless
phone. “Normal usage” in this context is defined as a
signal quality that is acceptable for normal operation.
Gallaudet University, RERC:
https://fjallfoss.fcc.gov/oetcf/eas/reports/Generic-
Search.cfm
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
265
ⅷ National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurement (NCRP). Report 86. 1986.
SAR Information
ⅷ International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection (ICNIRP) 1996.
0.724 W/kg @ 1g (HEAD)
1.14 W/kg @ 1g (BODY)
ⅷ Ministry of Health (Canada), Safety Code 6. The
standards include a substantial safety margin
designed to assure the safety of all persons,
regardless of age and health.
The exposure standard for wireless mobile phone
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC
is 1.6 W/kg.
THIS MODEL DEVICE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT’S
REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES.
For body worn operation, this phone has been tested
and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when
used with the HTC Corporation. Accessories supplied
or designated for this product. Use of other accessories
may not ensure compliance with the FCC RF exposure
guidelines.
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for
this model device with all reported SAR levels
evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure
guidelines. SAR information on this model device is on
file with the FCC and can be found under the Display
Grant section of
https://fjallfoss.fcc.gov/oetcf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm
after searching on FCC ID: NM8PG06100.
Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates
(SAR) can be found on the Cellular
Your wireless mobile phone is a radio transmitter and
receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed
the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF)
energy set by the Federal Communications
Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are
part of comprehensive guidelines and establish
permitted levels of RF energy for the general
population. The guidelines are based on the safety
standards previously set by both U.S. and international
standards bodies:
Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA)
website as http://www.phonefacts.net.
ⅷ American National Standards Institute (ANSI) IEEE.
C95.1-1992.
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the U.S. and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phone
used by the public is 1.6 Watts/kg (W/kg) averaged
over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a
substantial margin of safety to give additional
protection for the public and to account for any
variations in usage. Normal condition only to ensure
the radiative performance and safety of the
Use only the supplied or an approved antenna.
Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments
could impair call quality, damage the phone, or result
in violation of regulations. Do not use the phone with a
damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into
contact with the skin, a minor burn may result. Please
contact your local dealer for replacement antenna.
interference. As with other mobile radio transmitting
equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory
operation of the equipment and for the safety of
personnel, it is recommended that no part of the
human body be allowed to come too close to the
antenna during operation of the equipment.
Telecommunications & Internet
Association (TIA) Safety Information
Pacemakers
Body-worn Operation
The Health Industry Manufacturers Association
recommends that a minimum separation of six inches
be maintained between a handheld wireless phone
and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with
the pacemaker. These recommendations are
consistent with the independent research by and
recommendations of Wireless Technology Research.
Persons with pacemakers:
This device was tested for typical body-worn
operations. To comply with RF exposure requirements,
a minimum separation distance of 1 cm must be
maintained between the user’s body and the handset,
including the antenna. Third-party belt-clips, holsters,
and similar accessories used by this device should not
contain any metallic components. Body-worn
accessories that do not meet these requirements may
not comply with RF exposure requirements and should
be avoided.
ⅷ Should ALWAYS keep the phone more than six
inches from their pacemaker when the phone is
turned ON.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
267
ⅷ Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket.
WEEE Notice
ⅷ Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to
minimize the potential for interference. If you have
any reason to suspect that interference is taking
place, turn the phone OFF immediately.
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE), which entered into force as
European law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a
major change in the treatment of electrical equipment
at end-of-life.
Hearing Aids
The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the
prevention of WEEE, and in addition, to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such
wastes so as to reduce disposal.
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some
hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may
want to consult your service provider, or call the
customer service line to discuss alternatives.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical device, consult
the manufacturer of your device to determine if they are
adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your
physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this
information.
Turn the phone OFF in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF
energy.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The WEEE logo (shown at the left) on the
product or on its box indicates that this
product must not be disposed of or
dumped with your other household
waste. You are liable to dispose of all your
electronic or electrical waste equipment
by relocating over to the specified
RoHS Compliance
This product is in compliance with Directive 2002/95/
EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of
27 January 2003, on the restriction of the use of certain
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment (RoHS) and its amendments.
collection point for recycling of such
hazardous waste. Isolated collection and
proper recovery of your electronic and
electrical waste equipment at the time of
disposal will allow us to help conserving
natural resources. Moreover, proper
recycling of the electronic and electrical
waste equipment will ensure safety of
human health and environment. For more
information about electronic and
Owner’s Record
The model number, MEIDs, regulatory number, and
serial number are located on a nameplate inside the
battery compartment.
Record the serial number in the space provided below.
This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your
phone in the future.
electrical waste equipment disposal,
recovery, and collection points, please
contact your local city center, household
waste disposal service, shop from where
you purchased the equipment, or
Model: PG06100
Serial No.:
manufacturer of the equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
269
Flickr is a trademark of Yahoo! Inc.
User Guide Proprietary Notices
Twitter is a trademark of Twitter, Inc., and is used under
license.
©2011 Sprint. SPRINT and the logo are trademarks
of Sprint.
Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
HTC, the HTC logo, HTC EVO Shift 4G, Footprints,
HTC Innovation, HTC Sense, and HTC Sync are
trademarks or service marks of HTC Corporation.
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc.
This device contains Adobe® Flash® Player and
Adobe® Reader® Mobile software under license from
Adobe Systems Incorporated. Copyright ©1995–2011
Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe and Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
©2011 Google Inc. Used with permission. Google,
the Google logo, Android, the Android logo,
Android Market, the Android Market logo, Google Apps,
Google Calendar, Google Checkout, Google Earth,
Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google Talk, Gmail,
Picasa, and YouTube are trademarks of Google Inc.
All other company, product, and service names
mentioned herein are trademarks or service marks of
their respective owners.
Microsoft, Windows, ActiveSync, Excel, Outlook,
PowerPoint, Windows Media, Windows Vista, and Word
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity
Alliance, Inc.
microSD is a trademark of SD Card Association.
Facebook is a trademark of Facebook, Inc.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your device has been designed to provide you with
reliable, worry-free service. If for any reason you have a
problem with your equipment, please refer to the
manufacturer’s warranty in this section.
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty
For information regarding the terms and conditions of
service for your device, please visit www.sprint.com or
call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727.
ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ ࡗ Note: In addition to the warranty provided by your device’s
manufacturer, which is detailed on the following pages,
Sprint offers a number of optional plans to cover your
equipment for non-warranty claims. Sprint Total
Equipment Protection provides the combined
coverage of the Sprint Equipment Replacement
Program and the Sprint Equipment Service and
Repair Program, both of which are available separately.
Each of these programs may be signed up for within
30 days of activating your device. For more details,
please visit your nearest Sprint Store or call Sprint at
1-800-584-3666.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
271
alteration, misuse, improper installation or repair
or improper storage;
Manufacturer’s Warranty
(b) Product whose mechanical serial number or
electronic serial number has been removed,
altered or defaced;
(c) Damage from exposure to moisture, humidity,
excessive temperatures or extreme environmental
conditions;
(d) Damage resulting from connection to, or use of
any accessory or other product not approved or
authorized by the Company;
(e) Defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or
structural items such as framing and non-
operative parts;
12 Month Limited Warranty
HTC Corporation (the Company) warrants to the
original retail purchaser of this HTC handheld portable
cellular telephone, that should this product or any part
thereof during normal consumer usage and conditions,
be proven defective in material or workmanship that
results in product failure within the first twelve (12)
month period from the date of purchase, such defect(s)
will be repaired or replaced (with new or rebuilt parts)
at the Company’s option, without charge for parts or
labor directly related to the defect(s).
(f) Product damaged from external causes such as
fire, flooding, dirt, sand, weather conditions,
battery leakage, blown fuse, theft or improper
usage of any electrical source.
The antenna, keypad, display, rechargeable battery and
battery charger, if included, are similarly warranted for
twelve (12) months from date of purchase.
The Company disclaims liability for removal or
reinstallation of the product, for geographic coverage,
for inadequate signal reception by the antenna or for
communications range or operation of the cellular
system as a whole.
This Warranty extends only to consumers who
purchase the product in the United States or Canada
and it is not transferable or assignable.
This Warranty does not apply to:
(a) Product subjected to abnormal use or conditions,
accident, mishandling, neglect, unauthorized
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before sending your wireless device to HTC
Please follow the steps at www.htc.com/us/support or
return to the place of purchase for repair or
replacement processing. In addition, for reference to an
authorized Warranty station in your area, you may
telephone in the United States
Corporation for repair or service, please note that any
personal data or software stored on the device may be
inadvertently erased or altered. Therefore, we strongly
recommend you make a back up copy of all data and
software contained on your device before submitting it
for repair or service. This includes all contact lists,
downloads (i.e., third-party software applications,
ring tones, games and graphics) and any other data
added to your device.
+1(866) 449-8358.
THE EXTENT OF THE COMPANY’S LIABILITY UNDER
THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT PROVIDED ABOVE AND, IN NO
EVENT, SHALL THE COMPANY’S LAIBILITY EXCEED
THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER FOR
THE PRODUCT.
In addition, if your wireless device utilizes a Multimedia
card, please remove the card before submitting the
device and store for later use when your device is
returned, HTC Corporation is not responsible for and
does not guarantee restoration of any third-party
software, personal information or memory data
contained in, stored on, or integrated with any wireless
device, whether under warranty or not, returned to HTC
Corporation for repair or service.
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS WRITTEN
WARRANTY. ANY ACTION FOR BREACH OF ANY
WARRANTY MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN A PERIOD
OF 18 MONTHS FROM DATE OF ORIGINAL
To obtain repairs or replacement within the terms of
this Warranty, the product should be delivered with
proof of Warranty coverage (e.g., dated bill of sale), the
consumer’s return address, daytime phone number or
fax number and complete description of the problem,
transportation prepaid.
PURCHASE. IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE
LIABLE FOR AN SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR
ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WHATSOEVER. THE COMPANY SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR THE DELAY IN RENDERING SERVICE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
273
UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR LOSS OF USE DURING
THE TIME THE PRODUCT IS BEING REPAIRED OR
REPLACED.
Weather Disclaimer
ANY WEATHER, STOCK, OR OTHER INFORMATION,
DATA, OR DOCUMENTATION (“ACCESSED
No person or representative is authorized to assume
for the Company any liability other than expressed
herein in connection with the sale of this product.
INFORMATION”) ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OR ANY TECHNICAL
SUPPORT. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, HTC AND ITS AFFILIATES expressly
disclaim any and all representations and warranties,
arising by law or otherwise, related to the Accessed
Information, including without limitation any express or
implied representation or warranty of merchantability,
fitness for a particular purpose, non-infringement,
quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,
reliability, or usefulness. Without limiting the foregoing, it
is further understood that HTC and its Affiliates are not
responsible for any use or of the Accessed Information
or the results arising from such use, and that you use
such information at your own risk.
Some states or provinces do not allow limitations on
how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damage so the
above limitation or exclusions may not apply to you.
This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights, which vary from state to
state.
IN USA AND CANADA: Please go to
www.htc.com/us/support
Privacy Restrictions
Some countries require full disclosure of recorded
telephone conversations, and stipulate that you must
inform the person with whom you are speaking that the
conversation is being recorded. Always obey the
relevant laws and regulations of your country when
using the recording feature of your device.
Warranty Disclaimer
Your warranty is invalidated if you open or tamper with
the device's outer casing.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limitation of Damages
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HTC OR ITS
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE TO YOU, ANY USER, OR THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, ARISING IN CONTRACT,
TORT, OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, INJURY, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF
GOODWILL, LOSS OF BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY,
LOSS OF DATA, AND/OR LOSS OF PROFITS,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORESEEABILITY THEREOF
OR WHETHER HTC OR ITS AFFILIATES HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF
HTC OR ITS AFFILIATES EXCEED THE AMOUNT
RECEIVED FROM YOU, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL
THEORY UNDER WHICH THE CAUSE OF ACTION IS
BROUGHT. THE FOREGOING DOES NOT AFFECT
ANY STATUTORY RIGHTS WHICH MAY NOT BE
DISCLAIMED.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
275
Applications
C
Index
Settings iv
Calculator 89
Calendar 81
AutomaticSpeechRecognition
(ASR) 110
Adding an Event 81
Erasing Events 87
Numerics
1xRTT 172
3G 172
3-Way Call 163
B
Event Alert Menu 84
Meeting Request 83
Sending Invites 83
Showing or Hiding Events 87
Synchronizing Google
Calendars 87
Backing Up 72
Capacity 18
Charging 20
Safety 260
Data Transfer Rates 170
Settings ii
A
Bluetooth 142
Accessibility
Settings v
Activation 3
Adobe Reader 100
Airplane Mode 48
Alarm Clock 93
Amazon MP3 222
Answering Calls 24
App
Call
Car Kit 143
Headset 143
Sending Music 139
Browser 175
Menu iii
Call Forwarding 164
Call Guard 165
Call Waiting 163
Caller ID 162
Camcorder 119
Camera 119
Browser Menu 175
Finding Text 179
Zooming In or Out 178
Camera Flash 123
Add to Home ii
276
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash FAQ 123
Opening 119
Launching the Web 172
Password 5
Settings iii
Review Screen 120
Settings 124
Taking Pictures 122
Videos 123
Viewfinder Screen 120
Zooming 121
Security Features 52
User Name 171
Date & time
E
Account Settings 189
Composing and Sending
Settings v
Desk Clock 90
Device (illus.) 9
Device Settings
Creating Accounts 185
Deleting Accounts 190
Deleting Messages 188
Exchange ActiveSync 185
Managing the Inbox 187
Refreshing the Inbox 188
Sorting Messages 188
Viewing and Replying 186
Emergency Numbers 25
End-of-Call Options 27
Enhanced 911 (E911) 26
Entering Text 29
Car Kit 143
Car Mode
Exiting 98
Making a call 98
Clock 90
Airplane Mode 48
Application Settings 55
Data Synchronization
Settings 53
Date & Time Settings 56
Display Settings 44
Location Settings 46
Personalization Settings 40
TTY Use 48
Connect to PC
Settings iv
D
Data Roam Guard 166
Onscreen Keyboard 30
Slideout Keyboard 29
Event Alert Menu 84
Enabling and Disabling 52
FAQs 217
Device Updates 109
Display
Index
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exchange ActiveSync
Features 188
Minimizing or Turning Off
Tuning to a Station 141
Prepending a Number 61
Saving a Number 60
Home Screen 35
Customizing 37
Extended 36
Flagging Messages 188
Meeting Request 189
Message Priority 189
Out of the Office Reply 189
Folder
Add to Home ii
Footprints 241
Friend Stream 79
I
F
G
Importing Entries 72
In-Call Options 26
Installing HTC Sync 102
Internet
Face Detection 122
Facebook
Gallery
Viewing Pictures and Videos
Getting Around Your Device 21
Facebook for HTC Sense 76
FAQ 78
For Android 77
Synchronizing 55
Flash 123
FAQ 123
Flashlight 95
Flickr
Connecting 167
Google Latitude 238
Google Maps 232
GPS Navigation 231
GPS Services 230
K
L
Key Functions 9
Language & keyboard
Settings v
Location Settings 46
H
FM Radio 140
Adding Station Names 141
M
History 59
Mail
Erasing 61
Making a Call 60
Mail Widget 190
278
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Calls 22
From an Email Message 23
From Text Message 23
Using the Dialer 22
Menu i
Streaming Music 223
Adding an Entry 65
Assigning a Picture 69
Assigning Ringers 69
Contact Details Screen 66
Editing an Entry 68
Finding Entries 71
Friend Stream 79
Importing Entries 72
My Contact Card 64
Saving a Phone Number 66
Social Networks 76
Working with Groups 73
People Widget 74
Using 74
N
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile
Navigation, GPS 231
News 211
Messaging
Deleting Old Messages 47
Multimedia Messaging
(MMS) 152
News Screen 211
Notifications Panel 15
Notification 46
O
P
Preset Messages 47
Text Messaging 152
Voicemail 150
Onscreen Keyboard 30
Compact QWERTY 31
Entering Text 31
Phone Number
Displaying 22
Finding 27
Using as a USB Drive 117
Missed Calls 25
Multimedia Messaging (MMS)
Phone Keypad 31
QWERTY 31
Phone Ring Tone 41
Phone Settings 40
Photos
PDF files, reading 100
Music 135
Using 127
MP3 Store 222
Adding a Number 68
Index
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Pictures and Videos
Setting for Voice Calls 41
Types 41
Accessibility v
Accounts & sync iii
Battery v
Connect to PC iv
Data Synchronization 53
Display, menu iii
Hardware information v
Language & keyboard v
Location iv
Picture Messaging
Pictures and Videos 119
Playing Music 223
Playlists
Creating 137
POP3/IMAP Email
Adding 184
Power-Saving Tips 57
Vibrate 42
Roaming 164
Call Guard 165
Data Roam Guard 166
Roam Mode 165
S
Scenes
Customizing 39
Menu i
Screen Lock 50
Screen Orientation 45
SD & phone storage
Settings iv
Q
R
Quickoffice 99
Menu ii
Mobile networks, menu iii
Personalize, menu ii
Phone identity v
SD & phone storage iv
Search iv
Radio
Security
Listening 140
Settings iv
Settings 40
Recalibrating the Screen 45
Resetting Your Device 52
Ringers
Security iv
Social Network 54
4G, menu ii
Assigning to contacts 69
280
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software information v
Sound, menu iii
Sprint Hotspot, menu ii
Voice input & output v
Volume 42
VPN, menu ii
Wi-Fi, menu ii
Wireless & networks, menu ii
Connecting 170
Turning On 170
Sprint Service
Turning Your Device On and
Off 11
TV 219
FAQs 220
Twitter
Account Passwords 4
Activation 3
Dialing Sprint Services 29
Operator Services 6
Synchronizing 55
U
V
Updating Your Device 109
Shortcut
Add to Home ii
Silence All 43
Sleep Mode 12
SMS Text Messaging 152
Social Networks 76
Software Updates
Downloading 109
Sound
Settings iii
Speed Dial
Assigning Numbers 28
Sprint TV 219
Streaming Music 223
System Software
Update 51
Vibrate 42
Videos
Capturing 123
Viewing Map Layers 234
Voice Dialing 111
Voice Input 113
Voice input & output
Settings v
Voice Memos 111
Voicemail 150
Notification 150
System updates
Settings v
T
TeleNav GPS Navigation 231
Text Messaging 152
Preset Messages 154
Three-Way Calling 163
TTY Use 48
Index
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|